JP2020130251A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To use operation means effectively.SOLUTION: A game machine provided with a display device 41 for playing a game (decoration special symbol variation display game) that is stopped and displayed after variably displaying identification information (decoration special symbol) includes operation means (performance button 25, and a cross key not shown) that can be operated by a player and display control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying a display that changes according to the operation means on the display device 41. In the display that changes according to the operation of the operation means, the absolute value of the change amount based on one operation is varied depending on a predetermined condition (e.g., expectation level of a special symbol variation display game being executed).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a display device for playing a game in which identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed.

A symbol display device capable of displaying a variable display game that fluctuates a plurality of identification information, a decorative display device capable of displaying an effect image associated with the variable display game, and the variable display based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area. A game control device that controls the progress of the game and an effect control device that controls the display of the decorative display device based on the command information from the game control device are provided, and the stop result mode of the variable display game is predetermined. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, the operating means that the player can operate is provided on the front side, and the operating means is composed of one button. There is known a game machine configured to be able to execute a button effect that changes the display content of the decorative display device in response to an input from a button (.
For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-163844

In conventional game machines, the operating means have not been fully utilized.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which operating means are effectively utilized.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a game machine equipped with a display device that plays a game in which identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A display control means capable of displaying a display that changes according to the operation of the operation means on the display device is provided.
The display is characterized in that the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation differs depending on a predetermined condition.

According to the present invention, the operating means can be effectively utilized.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 variation start process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of the probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the determination condition monitoring process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means and the game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process in the 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process in the tenth modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode in eleventh modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the magnetic sensor in the twelfth modification. It is an operation chart of the magnetic sensor in the twelfth modification. It is a figure explaining radio wave abnormality monitoring and magnetic anomaly monitoring in the twelfth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the twelfth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the twelfth modification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of a button effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a button effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a button effect and an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of a production sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, the front frame (main body frame) 12 has a game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing and an operation handle 24 for a hitting ball launching device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section that displays the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is configured to be surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. Display 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters that produce the special figure variation display game, and background images that enhance the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right parts of the center case 40, a board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game, is provided by an operating movable effect member. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed by the display device 41 and the number of start memories. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. It includes a game display unit 92. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to play, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. In addition, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memory (special figure 2 hold). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 4.
By displaying in 1, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display area can be effectively utilized. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (normal figure start gate, start area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that won the prize at the starting gate 34 is the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Detected by.
Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side.
It always holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may win a prize in the closed state rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the closed state (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (closed state)
Convert to a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 is, for example,
Opening and closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
Equipped with a large winning opening that can be opened and closed by, and during a special game state or a small hit game state, the game ball can easily flow into the large winning opening by converting the large winning opening from a closed state to an open state. It is designed to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the game machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the launching force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for winning the starting winning opening 36, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), you can start the normal drawing gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 3
It is possible to aim for a prize in 7 or the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is launched into the right game area. The game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right gaming area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamp, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, 56 for notifying the starting memory number of each variable display game composed of.
Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. When a state occurs, the second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of a time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. Third game status display unit (third game status display, probability status display unit) 59,
Round display unit 6 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed)
0 is provided.
The batch display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven to change. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is out of order. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. Special figure 1 Hold indicator 54
Is the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. indicate. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting.

The first game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off when the left-handed player is in a more advantageous game state than the right-handed player (normal hitting). In the state, when the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off in the normal game state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur. When the time saving state occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the game machine 1
When the power of 0 is turned on, the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the game machine 10 is turned on, the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change state). Turns on the lamp.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn on. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (IC) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and D generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of DC32V from the AC power supply of 24V.
The power supply voltage is applied to the normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage and the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 during a power failure. Supply backup power supply unit 420
The game control device 100 is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
The data supplied to 1 (particularly the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, the control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10.
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. The reach state also includes, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state of identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result of a special figure variation display game (hit (hit (hit (hit)).
(Big hit or small hit) or miss), the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the operating state (time reduction) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the operating state), the number of start storages, and the like. Here, CPU
The 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and so on. It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of values. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button that forms the second operation unit of the operation units. The setting value change button is a push-type button, and the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the setting value change button is pressed.
If it is not pressed, it will be turned off.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, and 1/28 for setting 5.
0, setting 6 is 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the game machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is the probability setting value display device 153.
However, the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and the probability set value is set to 1 to 1.
It is designed to be displayed as a number of 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.
In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In this embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, and the probability setting value display device 15
3 and the like are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. It is supposed to be a setting means that enables it. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signals of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 so that the game control device 100 changes the probability setting value, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value is changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152.
The determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10.
It is also supplied from 0 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). (Based signal), out ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out switch that detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
Not supplied to 124. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
A second solenoid for opening / closing b (Public solenoid) 37c for outputting open / closed data.
An output port 134 is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal plate 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the solenoid drive signal. , The second driver 1 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135.
38b, the third driver 138c, which outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be output to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying it on the status display device 160 are provided. ..

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 500. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the processors 19a and 19b.
Is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). Board effect device 4 provided
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling 4 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are the address / data bus 340.
It is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via. The glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and the movable effect member that operates forms a movable effect device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function that detects the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to or an electronic component controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage like the above, DC 3.3V is based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPRESET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp and the motor are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
The game is played by launching a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. And general winning opening 35
When a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning winning opening is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3). It is discharged from the payout unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, if the normal figure start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal figure start memory number is set. Add (+1) and store one normal figure start memory in ROM111B. The number of stored prizes for starting the normal map is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random number value (hit random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal figure start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed.
In addition, the general drawing display 53 is composed of a display device 41, and as ordinary identification information, for example, numbers, symbols, etc.
A character symbol or the like may be used to display the variable for a predetermined time, and then stop and display the result.

If the result of the solenoid variable display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode is displayed on the solenoid display 53 according to the type of hit. Along with displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory. Displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

Then, when the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes ready to start the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, it is stored in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The hit / miss random value for jackpot determination is compared with the determined random value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability set value, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, the process of displaying the first special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example,
Decorative special figure that fluctuates to display numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. Performs processing to display the game. Further, the sub-game display unit of the sub-information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit in response to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol).
In each of the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU111A controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. To open 1
A round is set, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means that controls opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 is in a time-saving state (specific game state, high probability state in normal drawing, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
Can be generated. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a higher probability (normal figure high probability state) than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than when the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
That is, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 6.
When it becomes 00 msec and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500) of the first hit stop symbol
m seconds x 1 time), the opening time of the second stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of opening times (for example, 17)
00msec x 2 times), the opening time of the third stop symbol (opening time of the normal train) and the number of opening times (for example)
It is possible to set it to be 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map variation display game (
It is possible to control the second fluctuation time, which is shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than the one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1).
352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is set to the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second opening number of times to be larger than (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
The second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a memory of starting the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, large winning port switch 38a, out switch for detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which is provided with a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. There is. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and a predetermined register (step S3) is specified.
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4).
.. In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
A process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The third input port 124 has a setting value change switch 151 and a setting key switch 1.
A signal from 52 and a signal from the main body frame open detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 at the time of power-on The state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an open / close detecting means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, the front frame 12 is left open.
When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, if the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, RA
The M111C is cleared (initialized). Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12
Is required to be open.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from the power-on until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem when the power is turned on. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power failure are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S)
12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the timer value is 0 (step S).
12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the RWM (read / write memory) that can be read and written in RAM, EEPROM, etc. (step S13), and off-data is output (output) to all output ports. (Set to a state where there is no) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y).
, Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal
) (Step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S2).
1). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. If the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), the main body frame (step S21; N) starts from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier.
The front frame 12) determines whether it is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. Further, in the area for the initial value random number, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number, which are updated at any time, are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the accessory ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The information to be calculated and required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information about the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information about the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and The area for game control will be cleared. The area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number Area, area for variable pattern random numbers, and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the area for game control, and RA with this address set.
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control is cleared.

The status display area is initialized when the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, determines the correctness and is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the state may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. One or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting a plurality of areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the correctness may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the correctness. It may be judged collectively.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23).
). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), step S35
The process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. Further, when the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N),
When the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24). To do.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), step S30
And perform the processing when it recovers normally from the power failure. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the set value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It serves as an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S).
16; N or step S17; N), when it is determined that the checksums do not match (
Step S19; N) proceeds to step S25 to perform initialization processing of all RAM areas. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM error occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and the third read first.
From the state of the input port 124, it is determined whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, area for variable pattern random numbers, and area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). It is transmitted to (300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. Production control device 30
At 0, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, the speaker 19a , 19b outputs a voice to notify the user to change the probability set value. This notification continues until the power of the game machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the game machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and then the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35.
The process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the game machine is cut off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the RAM data remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may perform the notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display for notifying an abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S3
3 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability set value information which is the information of the selected probability set value, and the screen designation Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted by power cutoff due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed (step S).
35), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed up information is normal and the game is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and migrated from step S27, RA
Since the M clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initially. The value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Further, when all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent activity, the damage to the amusement store can be minimized. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process for setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153 can be displayed.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90 based on the reception of the command for which the probability setting is being changed.
LED light emission of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, operation of board effect device 44, speaker 19
Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by outputting voice by a and 19b. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, as a process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, RA
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variable pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44,
Model specification command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, RAM initialization command (to display the customer waiting demo screen and to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) Send multiple commands such as). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, the effect count information command and the high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of starting the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the setting of the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111.
Performed by A. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number) ), Save in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining a hit symbol of a normal figure (step S47), and then allow an interrupt (step S48).
In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there are also game machines in which the initial value random number of the winning symbol does not exist.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process in step S49.
Is set (step S50), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5).
1). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number update process (step S51; N)
Return to step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step S49 also includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, but as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
.. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S5).
2; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53).
), The process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S58) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and
An initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, step S26
Steps S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
The process of 8 may be repeated. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, step S2
When the state of repeating the processes 6 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, step S2
You may shift to 9 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state.
The open state of the front frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, the probability setting value change state may be shifted only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state without providing the setting key switch. That is, steps S22 and S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 without performing the process of step 23 (step S24; Y), the process may be shifted to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the area for initial value random numbers, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the game control by terminating without doing or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state in this way, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the control means stores stored contents even when the power is cut off. A storage means (RAM 111C) that can be held and a legitimacy determination means (game control device 10) that determines whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on.
0) and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value, and are stored in the storage means by the validity determination means. When it is determined that the information is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state. Also, R
When the AM111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value, the game is played by the initialization. It is possible to prevent the store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the legitimacy determination means. If it is determined that the value is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on information from the game control means. When the legitimacy determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means uses the specific information. This means that the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed based on the reception of. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). The control means includes a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)).
A storage means (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off is provided, and if the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is based on the information stored in the storage means. If the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on after recovery, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the game machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the game machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the control means includes a legitimacy determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on, and is stored in the storage means by the legitimacy determination means. When it is determined that the information provided is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the first operation unit is operated. This means that a notification prompting the user to turn on the power is given. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are assigned to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change)). Necessary for controlling the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means including the information of the probability setting value selected by the setting means. Storage means capable of storing information (RAM 11
1C) and the control means are configured to initialize the storage means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit is operated among the plurality of operation units. .. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the game machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt processing is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is CPU1.
It is started by inputting to 11A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (a large winning opening solenoid 38b, a general electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the launch stop signal is output in step S5 of the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S10) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.
5), the random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is performed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, and the winning port switch 3
5a, Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step) that monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the large winning port switch 38a and monitors errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.) S107) is performed.

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S1) for performing the process related to the change and confirmation of the probability set value.
08) is performed to determine whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) that outputs a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, specially A special figure game process (step S112) for performing processing related to the figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S113) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the probability set value is changed (step S).
In the case of 109; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability set value change state, random number update process 1 (step S105) or random number update process 2 (step S10).
6) may be omitted, and the random number may not be updated in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), which checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio wave fraud, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Monitoring process (step S1
16). Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line of (step S144) is acquired. In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is an output port for digit / external information output. 136
Is output to (step S146).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, the data of "big hit signal 1", the data of "big hit signal 2", the data of "big hit signal 3", the data of "big hit signal 4", the data of "design fixed number of times signal", the data of "starting port signal". , "Main prize ball signal" data) and launch permission output data (step S1)
50), the synthesized data is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, the off-output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability set value display permission flag is the probability set value display device 15.
This is a flag set when 3 is allowed to display the probability set value.

When this probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
Load the probability set value display data from the probability set value display data area (step S154), and then
The display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). As a result, the probability set value display device 153 is displayed regarding the probability set value. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability set value display (step S155). In this case, the off-output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability set value display device 15
Nothing is displayed in 3.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value among the test signals to the test firing device, the display data of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. As a result, the processing becomes simple, and the information of the probability set value does not change, and accurate information can be output. Of course, the data for display may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S162), and if it is not in the ON state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is divided into prize ball number counter areas (3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls in the case of this embodiment) set for each prize opening. Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted data. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three prize ball counter areas of the prize number counter area 1 and 10
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area. Each ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
Return to 181 and repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball region before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number which is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S
The process proceeds to 192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and step S18.
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with winning a game ball in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes of updating (increasing) the number of output of the main prize ball signal, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for turning on the payout busy signal (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, during the ball lending operation, during the shoot ball out error, during the overflow error, during the frame radio wave fraud, and the payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Number of prizes counter area 1
In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in (step S195), there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number. Is determined.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S197). With this judgment
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200. Therefore, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, a game machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. It is trying to maintain the payout control state based on the data of. However, conventional game machines require a backup function, so
There was a problem that it led to cost increase. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38).
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the player, and a payout control means that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means is a prize ball based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. When a command is controlled to be transmitted to the payout control means and a power failure occurs and the payout control means recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, immediately The prize ball command is issued in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means. It means that it is transmitted to the control means.

Further, in the game area 32, prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting prize opening 36, normal variable winning device 3)
7. A plurality of general winning openings 35 and special variable winning devices 38) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) has not transmitted a prize ball command instructing payout control of game balls for each number of prize balls. When the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying the above is provided, the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is not transmitted to each prize ball command counter to specify whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It means that it is done before specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled in a comprehensive manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38). The game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game ball, and the payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
The game control means is provided with a prize ball when the state signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area. External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs a prize ball signal) to the outside of the game machine.
And, the external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control by the state signal output from the payout control means. It becomes.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (
It is configured to be transmitted to the payout control device 200), and is a prize ball command counter (game control device 10).
In 0), the information of the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the information is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and the prize ball command to the payout control means is given. By updating in response to the transmission to, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means is decided to be paid out when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area. The number of prize balls is accumulated, and each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, the prize ball signal is output to the outside of the game machine. The prize ball signal counter is set in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. The information of the prize can be stored, and it is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, and the cumulative processing is still performed by updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means. It will be possible to memorize the number of prize balls that have not been played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 1 game ball.
The main prize ball signal is output every time the number becomes zero.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 for every 10 scheduled payouts (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the number of times of the updated (set) output.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows a winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
07) was shown. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is changed (step S299). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S).
300). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processes after step S301 are performed as the processes related to the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (
In the case of step S299; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed without processing related to winning.

In addition, in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal dynamic winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning slot is always available for winning. The winnings are not monitored, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, fraudulent monitoring of the special variable winning device 38 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be performed. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
Information on the illegal winning error notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (number of illegal winning judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches)
In addition, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined for each switch. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is not open, but the big winning opening Fraud & detect normal prizes while monitoring for fraudulent prizes in the mouth
The winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the Fuden even though the Fuden is not open. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, starting opening 1 switch 36a and winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step S30).
7) Perform the winning number counter update process (step S308) to update the winning number.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a game machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Status monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", status monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a game machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 2, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
Status monitoring is set based on the signal output from, and the status scan counter value is "1".
If is, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the game machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), Game machine status check process to determine the status such as whether an error has occurred (step S)
316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. 2 Signal-based condition monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed at a rate of once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability set value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S401), and if it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability set value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability set value change process is terminated.

Further, in the case where the probability setting value is changed (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. .. When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability set value information is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. Further, when the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed means that the probability setting value used in the game is newly set by performing the confirmation operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination of whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change button is pressed. When there is no input from the setting value change switch (
Step S406; N) proceeds to step S411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. In addition, when the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the probability setting value area for work is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is set to 6 here, it is possible to set the number to any other value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes the information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as a specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when displaying the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6,
A display other than this number may be used as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as a display of the probability set value. Further, when the display of the probability set value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability set value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the lapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a blinking display mode, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from that in the non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the non-specific display. ..

Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46,
Specific notification, which is a notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, and the like. That is,
Specific notification may be performed in combination with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the display device 41, the special figure 1 display 51, and the special figure 2 display may be displayed in the same manner as the probability set value display device 153.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (
Step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change process ends. When there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This will
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirmation operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), the command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value change process is completed. .. The effect control device 300 receives the command for changing the probability set value, and is based on the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90.
The probability setting value has been changed by displaying the above, emitting the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operating the board effect device 44, and outputting the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (
Step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process is terminated. Further, when the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM
The clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S418).
Step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may be cleared. In addition, among the areas for probability setting values, areas related to change work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags, are cleared. To. Therefore, since the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability set value display device 153 ends. In addition, since the flag for changing the probability setting value is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. The effect control device 300 is based on receiving a command for changing the probability set value.
Display of display device 41 and sub information display device 90, LED of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46
Due to the light emission, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the change of the probability set value is completed. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and notifying the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. Probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery are assigned are set to multiple types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from the above is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated due to the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display a display that is not used as a display of information on the probability setting value as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means displays the updated information for a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows a probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined because the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S).
433).

The term “during the game” means that the special figure variation display game is being executed, the normal map variation display game is being executed, the special game state is being executed, or the normal map variation display game is being executed, or the normal map is being hit. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, the effect control device 300 may be notified of the fact that the game is being played and the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. One or more states selected from the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the normal figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the normal figure may be used as a condition, for example, the special figure. It may be in the game when it corresponds to either the execution of the variable display game or the special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Further, even if the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game detects the game balls, it is assumed that the game is in progress for a predetermined period, and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode that shifts after a certain period of time has passed without the game being played. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to set the predetermined state (step S).
434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S4).
34; Y) sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (step S435) and sets the probability setting value display permission flag (step S436). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability set value currently set as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is displayed.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437).
The command under confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. Further, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and produces the board effect, based on receiving the command for confirming the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are used to notify that the probability set value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. in this case,
The probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Then, a command for completing the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442).
, Ends the probability setting value confirmation process. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the command of the probability set value confirmation end.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If becomes, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not proceed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the condition is not limited to this, and the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. Anything that selects whether or not to do so will do. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is determined by operating the operation unit. Based on the state, it is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and the state of the game controlled by the control means is a prohibited state that prohibits starting the confirmation state. In that case, even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and can generate the right to execute the game by winning, and the establishment of a predetermined condition. The hit state (normal figure hit state) in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result by executing the normal figure game (normal figure fluctuation display game) based on A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which the normal figure game is being executed or a hit state is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to the predetermined state in the state where the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and the prohibited state ends while the state is set to the predetermined state, the prohibited state is set. It will be in the confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, if the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game processing, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 3
It monitors the input of 7a, controls the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and sets the special figure display.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening 3
If there is a prize in the game ball in 7, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. Make a judgment.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
When it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. Is set to (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A
9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. Special figure display processing (step A10) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, sets the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc.
)I do.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. Large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting information necessary for the game
I do.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing.
16).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A).
19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special diagram 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , End the special figure game processing. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103)
In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize for the first starting port (step A).
In 103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A1).
09), the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111)
; N) ends the start port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A).
At 111; Y), an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
When it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state where it is possible to win a prize (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y). , The process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
If it is determined in 112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not the fraudulent occurrence of the normal electric power is occurring, it is determined that the fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure Start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed,
The start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37)
Set the non-winning information of the start port to be monitored (step A121), and start port 1 switch 3
Of 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning port 36) and the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure start port switch common processing, first, the start port 1 switch 36
Of a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step). A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the number of special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) Ends the special figure start port switch common processing.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A13
6), save the target start opening winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A14).
2).
When it is determined in step A142 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A142).
In N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed.
Special figure Start port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random values that are memorized and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored.
It is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A14) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process.
The details of 6) will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the start port winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first start port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize. (Step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A151).
In N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, in step A151, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special time is not shortened (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A1)
53; Y) ends the special figure reservation information determination process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not being hit or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A158).
In (N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and step A164
Move to the processing of.
On the other hand, in step A158, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot is a small hit depending on whether or not the large hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A).
163), the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1)
62), the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 that are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing. That is, the determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (
For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained). It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A305). Then, the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A3).
If it is determined as 05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and the effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), Special figure Ends normal processing. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command that forms the standby information is output to the effect control device 300.
It means that it is sent to.
On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309;
Y) shifts to the process of step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

Further, in step A301, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A302).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A303) is performed.
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
Further, in step A305, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step A306).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed.
Step A308) is performed to end the special drawing normal processing.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321).
The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with deviation information and jackpot information, and whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the small hit flag and the small hit information for the small hit flag is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 323), the special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, “0”) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 19A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second
The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 343), the special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to the information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 2 (step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
) And the details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state).
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process ends. Note that the loss in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in a later small hit determination process. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A3)
83; N) determines whether the state is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A).
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A38).
7). If the probability is not high (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value to be acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
) And the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability set value. Moreover, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. In addition, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

Note that a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402).
). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the jackpot determination process ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the small hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A405), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. , The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively specified in the judgment value table provided for each probability set value. Further, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, it depends on the probability setting value. And select the lower limit judgment value for small hits.

Further, the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381).
Or, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referenced probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, The setting may be made assuming that it is a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or the game may be stopped and an error notification may be performed when an abnormality occurs. In addition, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of big hit and each judgment of small hit, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state. Or, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when determining a large hit or when determining a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure change processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the change symbol determination flag (special figure 1 change flag or special figure 2 change flag) is prepared (step A).
601), the effect command setting process is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command that forms the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the production control device 300,
Upon receiving this symbol stop command, the variation display of the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

After that, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure is set as the process number (step A6).
05), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol) is saved. 2 (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. Save the value (eg 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and it is a jackpot (step A70).
5; If it is determined to be Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on,) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game
(Turn on the signal per special symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705; N).
If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (step A706) (step A706; Y), a test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory Turn on the signal during operation of the continuous operation device, turn on the signal per special symbol) RW
The process of saving in the test signal output data area of M (step A707) and setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Save in the upper limit area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is acquired.
Save to the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A71) is performed.
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.
The fanfare command corresponding to (step A716) is prepared, and the effect command setting process (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is O when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1).
N, a big hit with no balls (so-called sudden big hit, etc. The big winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1
), It turns ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and turns OFF otherwise.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is turned OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 470) corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game
0 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72)
3). After that, fanfare / fanfare for shifting to processing during the interval /
Interval processing Transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It serves as a means for generating a special game state that generates a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A706).
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
In 5; Y), the high-probability fluctuation number update process (step) for updating the value (high-probability fluctuation number) of the high-probability fluctuation number region for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state A
726), effect mode information check process related to effect mode setting (step A727)
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A).
728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is not high (step A728; N).
In), load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (step A).
729), the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and an effect command setting process (step A73) is prepared.
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Further, in step A728, when it is determined that the special figure is in high probability (step A72).
In 8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening opens due to the occurrence of a small hit, but in order to prevent the player from being aware of the occurrence of a small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the processing during the small hit fanfare is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit output). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A)
737), a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. High probability fluctuation number update process (step A743) for updating the area value (high probability fluctuation number), effect mode information check process (step A7) for setting the effect mode.
44) is performed, and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A7).
45), it is determined whether the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation match (step A7).
46). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752).
), Ends the processing while displaying the special figure.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A746; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to the process of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the Fuzu game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game are being set, and the normal map is being changed. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. B15) is performed to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14, and subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301; Y). )
Sets "0" for the normal processing of the normal figure as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal figure is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number). The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is It is determined whether the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the high probability of the normal figure, that is, the time is shortened (step B303).

When the normal figure is not in high probability (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal figure low probability is set (step B304), and when the normal figure is in high probability (step B).
303; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. Judge whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (Step B)
307).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3).
07; Y) saves the loss information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the loss stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the loss symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B).
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low, the value of the hit random number will be different in all cases of "0" to "250". In addition, when the probability is high, the hit random number value is any of "1" to "250", and the hit random number value is "0".
Further, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the free area after the shift is set to 0.
Clear (step B317) and update the number of reserved figures by -1 (step B318). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the random number storage area for the normal figure from 2 to 4 is moved from the random number storage area for the normal number 1 to 3 for the random number. Will be done.
Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B3).
20). Then, the normal map changing process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the normal figure changing process is performed, and the normal figure normal process is terminated. That is, the game execution means in which the game control device 100 executes the normal map variation display game as the variable display game (based on the normal map start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal map start gate 34 (inflow region). Make up.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the normal map display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 53, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the signal during fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the signal is saved.
The stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B405), and the normal map fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to the normal processing of the normal figure is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B516). After that, the fraudulent monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal map display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). Or "5") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (
For example, "4" or "7") is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per normal figure (step B506). Next, the normal power opening time (for example, 1700 m) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information
Acquires seconds or 2600 ms) and saves them in the normal map game processing timer area (step B5).
07).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal drawing (step B).
508), the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the normal figure fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the middle signal per normal symbol) and a signal related to starting the normal electric operation (for example, turning on the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation) are tested signals. In order to save in the output data area (step B510) and output the signal for driving (on) the normal electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N).
) Updates the per-figure control pointer by +1 (step B603), and performs branch processing according to the value of the per-figure control pointer (the value before the +1 update in step B603) (step B604).
Further, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y).
Does not perform the process of updating the per-figure control pointer area by +1 in step B603, but performs the branch process according to the value of the per-figure control pointer (step B604).

When the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is used. The wait time after the blockage of 37 is saved in the normal diagram game processing timer area (step B605), and the off data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B606) in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c. End the process during drawing.

When the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B607), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B608). Ends the processing during the normal drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled.
Save the opening time of the normal power, which is the opening time of, in the normal game processing timer area (step B60).
9) In order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B610), and the normal processing is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B614), and the normal processing is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is 300 m.
Seconds are 1700 msec as the normal power release time in step B607, 2600 msec as the normal power release time in step B609, and 6 as the normal power remaining ball processing time in step B613.
Save 00ms.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec elapses, the normal power release time is "1700 msec", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is "0", so the wait is 300 msec. The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is set to "2".
Since the wait time is set to 300 msec, the control pointer is updated to "3", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is set to "4". , So that the remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "2600 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, the normal power release time is "2600 msec", so the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the control pointer is "5", so the wait is 300 msec. The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "6", so the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "7", so it is 600 msec. The normal electric remaining ball processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal figure game (normal figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened. It serves as a control means for a normal variable winning device that can generate a hit state (normal figure hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111)
, Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
115), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116), create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a playground internal management device or a test firing test device, and set it in the output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved. It is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move to the processing of. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. ..

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S81).
2; Y), when a general electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when a big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Saved in the data area (step S817), saved the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
Move to the processing of. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), and frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N).
, When the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step S813; N) and the fraudulent prize opening is not occurring (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When a switch error is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If a switch error is not occurring (step S815).
In N), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
)I do.
Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not "0", the number is updated by -1 (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 32 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is used to create a system cycle (1/30 second per frame).
When 0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 are performed. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed and the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed.
The process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). C2
At 34; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y)
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and the error command (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, and a model specification command. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C24).
In 1; Y), a single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command processing (step C2) is performed.
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 when the start prize is won. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of the command related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending checking the probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of, the probability setting value may be changed. However, since the RAM is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, either the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the normal figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal figure is being hit. It may be a condition that it does not correspond to. In addition, it may be a condition that the customer is waiting. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

In addition, it was decided that the RAM 111C would be initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, but RA
The initialization of the RAM 111C may not be performed except when it is determined that the data of the M111C is abnormal.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to each probability setting value are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting value in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes a value of 0 to 5. The same applies to the working probability setting value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 is displayed in 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of settings 1 to 3 are assigned as settings 4 to 6. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch the probability value in three stages. Other than this, it is the same as in FIG. 35 (a). By doing so, when the six-step probability value is unnecessary, only the probability value needs to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

It should be noted that which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is free, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value change button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. It becomes the order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, the change stage can be set to 4 stages, and can be any stage of 1 to 6 stages.

FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, FIG. 35 (b)
In the setting 4 to setting 6, the setting 1 to the setting 3 are set, and the probability setting value display device 153 is set.
The display in is also set to 1 to 3 corresponding to this. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value come to correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge of the work to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set only one probability value substantially, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, the same display is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 even if the setting value change button is operated, but the operation can be performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It becomes easier for workers to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is set to 6, any number other than this may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35 (d), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be one. Further, in order to make it possible to set a larger number of steps, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more. Further, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, but the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed in response to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The jackpot probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, if only the big hit and the small hit are to be obtained as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game may be set according to a probability setting value that defines a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. This setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion with the setting sub-board of the game control device 100. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and it is possible to reduce the cost. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, an operation probability M may be provided for each probability set value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the game machine of this modification, the game control device 100 transmits a command for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modification includes a storage means capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. In this way, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the main process shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). Payout control device 2
At 00, based on receiving the command of this payout instruction, payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being impaired. it can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification prompting the change of the probability setting value, the notification that the payout may be performed is also performed. You may. Further, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 not only in the above case, but for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. 6 to the effect control device 300 (step). S40) and when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20 is also used.
You may send the command (specific information) of the payout instruction to 0.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated when the result of the game is a special result, the game is played. The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (setting means) that enables the selected probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The payout control means (payout control device 20) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information from the game control device 100) and the game control means.
0), and the game control means is a storage means (R) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off.
AM111C), the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, and the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the above, and is specified when it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. The information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means gives a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information, and the payout control means is the power supply. It is provided with a payout information storage means that can retain the stored contents even in the blocked state and can store the payout information received from the game control means, and when specific information is received, the game medium is based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. It means that the control to pay out is performed.
Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is prepared with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not the condition for determining the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Confirmed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end waiting flag (step S45).
7), the process of steps S421 to S415 is performed to end the confirmation condition monitoring process.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first definite condition on condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition as described later. Here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition is satisfied with the input from the touch switch. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor the end wait flag, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is an end waiting flag (step S451).
). If there is an end waiting flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, the monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end wait flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. When the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3) is set in the change end timer area.
Save seconds) (step S453) and set the end wait flag (step S454)
).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process ends. When the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processes after step S457 are performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second confirmation condition is satisfied and the selected probability setting value is set when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch that performs the second operation is performed. It has become so.

As described above, in this modification, the probability setting value selected by satisfying either the first confirmation condition or the second confirmation condition is set as the probability setting value used in the game.
Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, if the power supply is shut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value change state, the operation handle 24 may be touched to notify that the selected probability setting value is set. This notification may be always performed in the state where the probability set value is changed, or may be performed only in the state where the end wait flag is set. Further, the first definite condition and the second definite condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second confirmation condition may be set only when the setting key switch is turned off. Further, a probability setting value selected by preparing three or more definite conditions and satisfying any of them may be set.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, if the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability setting value change state, and the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value, but for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is among a plurality of confirmation conditions. It means that the selected probability setting value is set based on the fact that either of them is satisfied. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed without fail. Further, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

In addition, the setting means is used when the power is cut off before any of the plurality of confirmation conditions is satisfied.
This means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of definite conditions include a first definite condition and a second definite condition, the first definite condition is that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second definite condition is the first operation. Is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed without fail.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not have a setting key operation unit as a setting means, and does not have a setting key switch 152. In addition, the transition conditions to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S61).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process when the power is normally restored from the power failure. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability set value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the figure is shown in order to perform the RAM initialization process and the process of changing the probability set value so that the set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of step 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. Further, when the flag for changing the probability setting value is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N).
Goes to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is not normal, the RAM clear start address 1
(Step S25), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the setting change instruction command (specific information)
Is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as in step S62.
When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y),
The process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62, S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modification, the staff can shift to the probability set value change state by inserting the game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is provided. It is determined whether or not this transition condition is satisfied from the state of the input port 1 into which the detection signal from is input. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
The probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process ends. As a result, the probability setting value is changed.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). Then, if the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process ends. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, step S of FIG. 6 is performed to initialize the RAM area for game control.
If the data is transferred to 41 and the backed up data is abnormal, step S
The processing of 28 and S29 is performed and the control is stopped.

The transition conditions may or may not be changed at the amusement store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be a transition condition. In this case, it may be a condition that only the detection by the detection means has been detected, or it may be a predetermined condition that the detection means has detected a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (detection number, detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor in the winning region is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 and the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection means that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, the keyboard may be provided at a position where the keyboard can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detection means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by the password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the game machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability setting value change state is made possible, but the power of the game machine is turned on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the game machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on. The period for monitoring the establishment of the above may be started.

From the above, in a game, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state that gives the player a game value can be generated. Detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a,
Starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is a mode predetermined by the detection means. It means that the probability setting value can be selected when the probability setting value is detected. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means functions in the same manner as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally.
In addition, the number of game machines that can simultaneously change the probability setting value is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on a plurality of game machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, it is used in a game in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). In addition, the setting means makes it possible to select a probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means functions in the same manner as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of game machines that can simultaneously change the probability setting value is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on a plurality of game machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode within a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability set value is changed by the set value changing operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and the state of the DIP switches corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Will be.

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153
May not be provided. Further, a cover covering the DIP switch may be attached so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and turned on when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be turned on all the time, or may be turned on only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

In addition, the setting value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, and any switch can be used as long as the probability setting value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. It can be anything.

Also, depending on the state of the setting key switch 152, the probability setting value is changed.
As in the third modification described above, the probability set value change state may be changed depending on the state of the set value change switch 151, and the probability set value change state may be terminated after a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started.
In addition, it may be performed regularly at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, the notification that an abnormality has occurred may be given, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example has a setting key switch 152 and CP for enabling the change of the probability setting value.
If the wiring to and from the U111A is broken, the game cannot be played.

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become like. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154.
Is connected to. Note that the setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the probability set value is not changed and the game can proceed. Further, the gaming machine of the present modification is provided with an LED that serves as a confirmation means that makes it possible to visually recognize the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the probability setting value is changed on the condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information input based on the operation of the operation unit so as to be in a specific state, and is based on the input of the specific operation information. The probability setting value is changed so that the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot proceed, and by ending the probability set value change state, the game can proceed.

FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in either case
The input to the 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability setting value can be changed, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability set value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, by making it possible to input specific operation information even when the wire is broken or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding when it is abnormal.
Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 here, they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, the game control device 10 is a setting sub-board that serves as a setting means including a setting key switch 152 and the like.
Although it is said that it is provided separately from 0, the game control device 100 may be provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like so that the setting means is integrated with the game control device 100. In this case as well, the setting means is set by the same configuration. It is possible to detect a disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or a disconnection of the connector.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be entered. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value connected to the control means and assigned the probability value used for the lottery of the game are set by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not proceed with the game when the specific operation information is input. If the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[6th modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the game is in progress (step S433; Y).
), The off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434;
In N), the off state confirmation flag is set (step S473), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472).
The processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the setting key switch is turned off when the game is not in progress. When it changes to the on state, it shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is left on during the game, it is intended during the game in which the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered. If the setting key switch is turned on without doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from being inactive (not prohibited) and shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode to display the probability setting value. .. That is, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the probability set value only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) is a control means (game control device 100).
The operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key operation unit)) when the game state controlled by) is not in the prohibited state.
It means that the confirmation state is set only when the state of the setting key switch 152)) is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being unintentionally shown.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit, a setting value change button forming the second operation unit, and a RAM clear button as the third operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. Further, the RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, the process proceeds to step S41 when the RAM clear switch is on (the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y). That is,
The RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. In this probability setting value change process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed, and the process of determining the selected probability set value is performed. Do.

In this way, by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button, the RAM 111
Since C can be initialized and the probability setting value can be confirmed by this RAM clear button, the RAM initialization and the probability setting value determination work can be selected by using the minimum operation unit. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the amusement store. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the game machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

In addition, when the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to only initialize the RAM without shifting to the state, it may be necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state when only the RAM is to be initialized. It is possible to improve work efficiency in a game store.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM.
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) of the clear button (RAM clear switch) is operated. In addition, it is possible to initialize the storage means (RAM111C). Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be determined.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit.
Setting means (game control device) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit (set value change button (set value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)). 100), a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game by the control means including the information of the probability set value selected by the setting means, and a closed state covering the front surface of the game machine 10. The main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted into an open state and an open / close detecting means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / closed state of the main body frame are provided, and the control means is in the open state of the main body frame. If there is, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and when the power of the game machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the open / close detection means detects that the main body frame is open and the power of the game machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability set value can be changed. It means that the storage means is initialized without changing the state. Therefore, when it is desired to only initialize the RAM, it is not necessary to change the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

Further, the control means is detected by the open / close detecting means when the main body frame is in the open state, and the first
When the power of the game machine is turned on while the operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and the main body frame is closed. If the open / close detection means detects the state and the power of the game machine is turned on while the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the probability set value can be changed. It means that the storage means is initialized without doing so. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the probability set value can be changed, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, it does not shift to the probability set value change state, so that fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In FIG. 45, by performing the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value is changed. However, the setting key switch is on and RAM
The fact that the clear switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.
By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value change state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment not provided with the RAM clear button, it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the game machine is turned on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and when the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and , When the power of the game machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without making the probability setting value changeable. It can be said that. In this case as well, the fact that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be exchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing after step S407 is performed, the selected probability setting value is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing after step S412 is performed. , The process of determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[8th modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modified example differs in the operation of confirming the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change processing, when the setting value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processing after step S407 is performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed, and the process for determining the selected probability set value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and there is a first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the set value change button is released (when the set value change switch 151 is changed to the off state) in a short pressing operation. The reason why the setting value change button is released is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time or longer, and there is a second input mode when the specified time elapses. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is fixed when there is a long-time pressing operation exceeding the specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while pressing the setting value change button. The work of changing, confirming, and clearing the RAM of the set value can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.
Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the game machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-mentioned operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be distinguished from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151)). When the power of the game machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM1)
11C) can be initialized, and by operating a predetermined operation unit,
The selected probability setting value can be determined.

[9th modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N).
), It is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is ended and the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but here, the magnet fraud, the panel radio wave fraud, the frame radio wave fraud, the general electric wave fraud, and the big prize opening fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activity, and by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such anomalies occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball breakage error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but these may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known until the person in charge confirms the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started to prompt the confirmation of the game machine. In a device external to the game machine, it is possible to grasp that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal beyond the predetermined time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the setting key switch is turned on. If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the state is on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state when a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can do it. In this case, the off state confirmation flag is cleared when the game is in progress (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y).

In this way, by preventing the transition from the probability setting value confirmation mode to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on from the state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is prohibited to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on while a predetermined abnormality is occurring, the probability setting value is changed to a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved (a state that is not a prohibited state). It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the probability set value only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is determined by operating the operation unit. Based on the state, it is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Means that even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the game machine. When any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is found. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the information is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the game machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is shown. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by this.

In addition, a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling a game is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the game machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the game machine has occurred.

Further, in the setting means, the operation unit is set to a predetermined state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred.
If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, the confirmation state is set based on the fact that all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved. Therefore, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when a predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the setting means is set to the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being unintentionally shown.

[10th modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (
In step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not in progress (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S).
512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability set value confirmation process ends. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that was interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be resumed.

In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the batch display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, if the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variable display game or the normal map variable display game, the variable display on the batch display device 50 may be continued. Further, the batch display device 50 may be displayed to indicate that it is in a suspended state.

Further, when the game is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, a restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. A light emitting member or a movable accessory may be used to produce an effect corresponding to the interruption. Further, the display on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

Further, even when the game is interrupted, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the general winning opening 3
The winning of 5 and the special variable winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Also,
The payout of the game ball may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[11th modification]
Next, the eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example is designed to output a sound accompanying a change in the probability set value.

FIG. 50A shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the power of the game machine is off, turn the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and set when the power of the game machine is turned on in this state. The value is changed (t12). The game control device 100 sends a command for which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300 based on the setting value change state, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is changed based on the reception of this command. Outputs a notification voice during change. The changing notification voice may be any voice, and examples thereof include a voice saying "probability setting value is being changed" and a specific music or alarm sound. In addition, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 also notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "The probability setting value is being changed". That is, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. By performing the notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the clerk of the amusement store and the surroundings It can be noticed by the player and can prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability setting value changing state ends (t13). Based on the end of the set value change state, the game control device 100 issues a command to end the probability setting change to the effect control device 300.
The effect control device 300 outputs the probability set value notification voice for notifying the information of the probability set value set over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command (t13 to t14). After that, the sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

The probability set value notification voice may be any voice, and for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a voice corresponding to the set probability set value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the voice "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, it may be a voice other than this, or it may be a specific music or an alarm sound. Further, the display device 41 also displays according to the similarly set probability set value. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "The probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, the display may be other than this.

In addition to this, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified as corresponding to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability set value is notified by using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding games. A person can be aware of it, and it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) can grasp that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, the external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing so, the game store can immediately grasp the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. Further, the probability set value notification voice may be output during the period during which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. Further, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, and the board decoration device 4 indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.
6. The notification may be made by an effect device such as a board effect device 44.

Further, each time the probability setting value is updated by the operation in the probability setting value change state, the sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Further, the other effect device may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

From the above, the game is executed in the game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A control means (game control device 100) for controlling and a setting means (game control) capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. Device 100) and a production device (speaker 19a) that produces a game.
, 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44), and the selected probability set value can be notified by the effect device. .. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be prevented. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the end of the probability set value change state, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

[12th variant]
Next, a twelfth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponement function, an initial setting cancel function, an output ON holding function, and an output OFF holding function.
FIG. 51A shows an internal circuit and a connection diagram of the magnetic sensor 61 in this modified example.
The magnetic sensor 61 detects the magnetic state in the arrangement environment and detects fraudulent acts (magnet fraud) by magnets or radio waves. The magnetic sensor 61 is installed so that, for example, the distance from the surface (the surface on the player side) of the cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 to the detection surface of the magnetic sensor 61 is 40 mm to 60 mm.

As shown in FIG. 51A, for example, the magnetic sensor 61 includes a SEL-IN terminal, and the sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is set by the value of the resistor Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal. That is, the magnetic sensor 61 can switch the sensitivity in a plurality of stages (for example, four stages). The sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is selected by the resistor Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal, set at the time of initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61, and is configured to be internally held until the power is cut off, and the sensitivity is changed in the power supply state. Is not possible.
The SEL-IN terminal is connected to the GND via a resistance value corresponding to the sensitivity used (ie, via a resistor Rd). The GND to which the resistor Rd is connected is the GND of the magnetic sensor 61.
(That is, the GND connected to the GND terminal of the magnetic sensor 61) is common.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 51A, a magnetic sensor main circuit 61a that detects a magnetic state and determines the occurrence of an abnormality.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a includes a circuit for detecting magnetism, a reference magnetic state storage means for storing the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of the magnetic sensor 61 as a reference magnetic state, and a reference magnetism for instructing the start of storage of the reference magnetic state. When the state storage command means and the reference magnetic state are compared with the magnetic state in the current arrangement environment of the magnetic sensor 61 and a difference outside the predetermined allowable range is detected, it is detected as abnormal magnetism. It is provided with an abnormal signal output means for outputting an abnormal signal as a signal.

The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b when abnormal magnetism is detected.
The OUT terminal is turned ON. Further, when abnormal magnetism is not detected (when not detected), the output transistor 61b is turned ON and the OUT terminal is turned OFF. As a result, the game control device 100 can detect whether or not abnormal magnetism has been detected depending on the state of the OUT terminal of the magnetic sensor 61. That is, the magnetic sensor 61 serves as an abnormal magnetism detecting means for detecting the generation of abnormal magnetism.
Here, "abnormal magnetism" is generated, for example, by the approach of a magnet or the emission of radio waves, and if abnormal magnetism is generated, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act (magnet fraud) has been performed. It is in a high state.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 performs an initial setting (calibration) operation for storing the reference magnetic state based on the power-on of the game machine 10. In the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, when the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value, the reference magnetic state storage command means stores the reference magnetic state in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a with respect to the reference magnetic state storage means. It is started by instructing the start of.
That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting function of performing an initial setting (calibration) operation in order to correct the influence of peripheral magnetism. This initial setting operation automatically adjusts the detection area, and the automatically adjusted set value is internally retained until the power is cut off. The initial setting operation requires, for example, a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If you drive an electric drive source such as a solenoid or motor or bring a magnet close to it during the initial setting operation, it will be affected by magnetism and cause the detection area to fluctuate. Therefore, from the start to the end of the initial setting operation Care must be taken not to be affected by magnetism.

From the above, the magnetic sensor 61 (abnormal magnetic detection means) includes a reference magnetic state storage means that stores the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of the magnetic sensor 61 as a reference magnetic state, and the reference magnetic state and the current magnetic sensor 61. Abnormal signal output that outputs an abnormal signal as a detection signal to the game control device 100 as if abnormal magnetism was generated when a difference outside the predetermined permissible range was detected by comparing with the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of The reference magnetic state storage means starts the storage of the reference magnetic state based on the power-on of the game machine 10.
By providing such a magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to set the reference magnetic state according to the installation environment of each game machine in the game store in addition to the difference for each model, and more accurate fraud detection can be performed. Can be done. Further, since the reference magnetic state storage means starts storing the reference magnetic state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the reference magnetic state can be changed even if the reference magnetic state changes due to the movement of the game machine or the remodeling of the game store. It is possible to always perform accurate fraud detection.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), for example, the magnetic sensor 61 includes a DOOR-IN input terminal (door signal input terminal), and the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is Hi. In the state, the magnetic sensor 61 is configured not to function.
The initial setting operation when the power is turned on is that there is power supply to the magnetic sensor 61, and
This is executed when both the conditions that the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state are satisfied.
Therefore, when the door signal is in the Low state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is immediately started (see FIG. 52 (a)).
On the other hand, if the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the door signal is Lo.
After the w state is reached, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is started (see FIG. 52 (b)).
That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponement function that executes the initial setting operation after the door signal is in the low state when the door signal is not in the low state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting canceling function of stopping the initial setting operation when the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation. When the initial setting operation is stopped, the initial setting operation is restarted when the door signal is returned to the Low state while the power supply to the magnetic sensor 61 is maintained.
Further, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the output transistor 61b to the output ON state (that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected (that is, non-magnetism)) when the door signal is in the Hi state after the initial setting operation is normally performed. It has an output ON holding function that holds the same state as (at the time of detection) (Fig. 52 (Fig. 52).
See a) and (b)).
Further, when the initial setting operation cannot be normally performed due to the influence of magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the output transistor 61b in an output OFF state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is detected). It has an output OFF holding function (see FIG. 52 (c)). In order to release the output OFF state of the output transistor 61b, it is necessary to shut off the power supply of the magnetic sensor 61 once and restart it while considering the influence of the surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally.

Initial setting postponement function, initial setting cancellation function, output ON holding function and output O of the magnetic sensor 61
The details of the FF holding function will be described with reference to the operation chart shown in FIG. In addition, FIG.
The “initial setting time” in 2 is the time from when the power supply of the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on to when the detection state is accurately output.
FIG. 52A shows an operation chart when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed) and the initial settings are normally performed. An example is shown.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a starts the initial setting operation when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t21). The initial setting operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t22). Further, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is used from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22).
) Holds the output transistor 61b in the output ON state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is not detected (not detected)).

If the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation, the initial setting cancel function is executed. Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a stops the initial setting operation when, for example, the door signal is in the Hi state between the start and the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22). The door signal returns to the Low state, and the Low state of the door signal is maintained until the initial setting operation is completed, so that the initial setting operation is completed for the first time. The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a
Holds the output transistor 61b in the output ON state from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22) even when the initial setting operation is stopped.

After the initial setting operation is completed, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is Hi.
When the state is reached, the output ON holding function is executed (t23 to t25, t26 to t2).
9). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is provided while the door is open (t23 to t2).
4. The output transistor 61b is held in the output ON state during (t24 to t25, t28 to t29) until a predetermined standby time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed (t26 to t28). To do.
When abnormal magnetism is detected (t31), the output transistor 61b is turned off.
The output transistor 61b returns to the ON state when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected (t32). However, since the output transistor 61b holds the output ON state during the execution of the output ON holding function, the output transistor 61b is detected when abnormal magnetism is detected during the execution of the output ON holding function (t26 to t29). Does not turn off when abnormal magnetism is detected (t27), but turns off when the execution of the output ON holding function ends (t29).

In FIG. 52B, the door is closed (front frame 12 and glass) after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on when the door is open (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open). An example of an operation chart when both of the frames 15 are closed) and the initial setting is normally performed is shown.
If the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting postponement function is executed (t41 to t43). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is when the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t41). Starts the initial setting operation at a time (t43) when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the door signal is in the Low state. The initial setting operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t44). Further, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61
In a, the output transistor 61b is in the output ON state (that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected (when not detected)) from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44). Keep in the same state).

If the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation, the initial setting cancel function is executed. Specifically, in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, for example, when the door signal is in the Hi state between the time when the door signal is in the Low state and the time when the initial setting operation is completed (t42 to t44), the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is in the Hi state. Cancel the initial setting operation. The door signal returns to the Low state, and the Low state of the door signal is maintained until the initial setting operation is completed, so that the initial setting operation is completed for the first time.
In the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, even if the initial setting operation is stopped, the output transistor 6 is used from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44).
Holds 1b in the output ON state.
Then, when the door signal is in the Hi state after the completion of the initial setting operation, the output ON holding function is executed (t45 to t47, t48 to t51).

In FIG. 52 (c), the power of the game machine 10 is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), and the initial setting becomes abnormal and the door is opened. Status(
After the power of the game machine 10 is turned on when at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open), the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed). An example of the operation chart when the initial setting becomes abnormal is shown.
If the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not normally completed, the output OFF holding function is executed (t62 to t68, t72 to t77). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61
In a, for example, the detection area is automatically adjusted by the initial setting operation, but if the automatic adjustment cannot be performed normally due to the influence of magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61 at that time, the initial setting operation ends. Until the power of the magnetic sensor 61 is cut off (t62 to t68, t72 to t77)
, The output transistor 61b is held in the output OFF state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is detected).

That is, when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not normally completed, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b and turns on the OUT terminal as in the case of detecting abnormal magnetism. As a result, the magnetic error is notified, so that the clerk of the game store can recognize that the problem has occurred. In this case, the clerk of the amusement store is notified of the magnetic error even though the magnet is not fraudulent, so that the output is OF.
In order to determine that the F holding function is being executed and cancel the execution of the output OFF holding function, the power of the game machine 10 is cut off once while considering the influence of surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally. And reintroduce.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), in order to use the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61, the signal input to the DOOR-IN input terminal ( It is necessary to switch the door signal) between the Low state and the Hi state. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the DOOR-IN input terminal is a door (front frame 12 or glass frame 15).
By connecting to the GND via a transistor Tr that turns ON / OFF according to the opening / closing of the magnetic sensor 61, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 can be used.

The transistor Tr serves as a switching means for switching between connection and non-connection between the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND. Specifically, the transistor Tr is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), and the DOOR-IN input terminal and G
In addition to connecting the ND, when the door is open (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open), it is turned off and the DOOR-IN input terminal and the GND are disconnected. ..
Therefore, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state because the DOOR-IN input terminal and the GND are connected when the door is closed, and the DOOR- is in the low state when the door is open. Since the IN input terminal and the GND are disconnected, the Hi state is set.

The DOOR-IN input terminal is a terminal used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism.
That is, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are functions used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism.
For example, if the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is executed when the door is open, there is a possibility that the ambient magnetic field environment may deviate between the initial setting state and the used state, but the initial setting is postponed. By executing the function or the initial setting canceling function so that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not performed when the door is opened, the occurrence of such a deviation can be avoided.
Further, for example, when a detection signal (abnormal signal) is output from the magnetic sensor 61 when the door is open, the detection signal may be a detection signal due to a change in the ambient magnetic field environment due to the opening and closing of the door. There is. That is, there is a possibility that the detection signal (abnormal signal) is output even though the magnet is not illegally performed, but the output ON holding function is executed to output the detection signal (abnormal signal) when the door is opened. By canceling, it is possible to avoid false detection of fraud.

However, when the initial setting postponement function or the initial setting cancel function is executed, the initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61 is performed between the time when the door is open and the time when the predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. Since the operation is not executed, there is a problem that it takes time from turning on the power of the game machine 10 until the game can be performed.
Further, when the output ON holding function is executed, magnet fraud is detected during the period when the door is open and the time when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed. However, since the output of the detection signal (abnormal signal) is canceled, magnet fraud is performed aiming at the time when the door is open or the time when the predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. There's a problem.
Therefore, in this modification, in order to solve these problems, it is decided to disable the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61.

Specifically, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), since the DOOR-IN input terminal is directly connected to the GND, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal. Is always in the Low state and does not switch to the Hi state. That is, in this modification,
By connecting the DOOR-IN input terminal directly to the GND, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are invalidated.
Therefore, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on regardless of whether the door is open when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. When the initial setting operation is started (t81) and the initial setting operation is completed, the magnetic sensor 6
Monitoring of magnetic anomaly according to 1 becomes effective (t82). On the other hand, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the monitoring of radio wave abnormality by the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the frame radio wave sensor (not shown) becomes effective ((not shown).
t81). Therefore, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, radio wave fraud can be detected, but
Magnet fraud cannot be detected. Therefore, there is a possibility that the magnet is illegally performed while aiming at the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

Therefore, in this modification, in order to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the processing related to the probability setting value is performed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. It was made possible to do.
The process related to the probability set value is a process performed according to the operation of the clerk of the game store. That is, while the processing related to the probability set value is being performed, since there is a clerk near the game machine, cheating is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by making it possible to perform the processing related to the probability setting value in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main processing shown in FIGS. 54 to 55 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 to 6. In this main process, instead of the process related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12), the process related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) is performed.
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 to 6, the processing after step S13 is performed after the power-on delay timer has timed up (for example, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the power-on). Therefore, the processing after step S13 is performed after the initial setting operation (within 1.5 seconds) of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed.
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 54 to 55, the processing after step S48 is performed after the calibration timer has timed up (for example, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the power-on). Therefore, the process executed before step S48 is performed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, for example, the game control device 100 sets an initial value in the calibration timer immediately after the process of step S6 (step S91), and starts updating the calibration timer. (Step S92), the process proceeds to step S8. By the process of step S92, the process of updating the calibration timer (for example, updating -1) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, when it is determined whether the calibration timer has timed up immediately before the process of step S48 (step S93) and it is determined that the time has not been timed up (step S93; N). Repeats the process of step S93. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is up (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S48.

In the case of this modification, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 requires a maximum time of 1.5 seconds. Therefore, in step S91, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set as the initial value. This will
When the time of the calibration timer is up, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is surely completed.
As described above, the processing related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12).
By performing the processing related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) instead of, the processing related to the probability set value (process for shifting to the probability set value change state (step S37) during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. It becomes possible to perform a predetermined game control process (for example, steps S1 to S47) including ~ S40)). As a result, the magnetic sensor 61
Since a predetermined game control process including a process related to the probability set value is executed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the above, the time from turning on the power of the game machine 10 until the game can be played can be shortened. Further, since the processing related to the probability setting value can be executed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

A command (command at the time of power failure recovery) transmitted to the effect control device 300 during the update of the calibration timer (that is, between the time when the initial value is set in the calibration timer and the time when the calibration timer is up). (Step S34), command during change of probability setting (step S40), command at RAM initialization (step S44)
Etc.) and the command transmitted to the payout control device 200 may be transmitted when the calibration timer has timed up. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command.

Further, it is determined that the calibration timer has timed up (step S93; Y).
After that, a command for notifying the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 can drive an electric drive source such as a solenoid or a motor after confirming that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed. That is, since it is possible to control the electric drive source not to be driven during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to prevent the electric drive source from affecting the memory of the reference magnetic state. it can. During the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, only the electric drive source having a low drive frequency is prohibited, and the electric drive source having a high drive frequency such as a motor that is always driven is the magnetic sensor 61. It may be possible to drive during the initial setting operation.

The launch of the game ball may also affect the memory of the reference magnetic state. However, in this modified example, the firing of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Specifically, a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, and then a firing permission signal is output by performing an output processing (step S104) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 4) to enable firing. The signal can be set to the permitted state. Then, in this modification, the process of permitting an interrupt after the calibration timer has timed up (step S).
Since 48) is performed, the timer interrupt process is not executed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Therefore, in this modification, since the firing of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the firing of the game ball does not affect the memory of the reference magnetic state.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality is enabled when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the door is in the open state at the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality may be effective after the door is in the closed state.

Of course, even in other modified game machines, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancel function, and the output O
It is possible to use a magnetic sensor 61 having an N holding function and an output OFF holding function. Further, not only in the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 to 6, but also in the main processing shown in FIGS. 36, 39, and 45, the processing related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12).
), The processing related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) can be performed.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present modification, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when the result of the game becomes a special result. Calibration (calibration) performed when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on in the game machine
When the predetermined condition after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is satisfied (for example,) by suspending the initial setting)
A magnetic sensor 61 capable of postponing calibration that executes calibration (when the main body frame (front frame 12) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) are closed) and a probability value used for a game lottery are assigned. It is equipped with a setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values, invalidates the execution of calibration postponement, and sets the probability in parallel with the calibration. It is possible to perform processing related to the value (processing for shifting to the probability setting value change state (steps S37 to S40)) (
(See FIG. 53).

Therefore, since it is possible to perform the processing related to the probability set value in parallel with the calibration, it is possible to suppress the magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) aimed at during the calibration of the magnetic sensor 61.
In addition, it is possible to perform processing related to the probability set value in parallel with calibration, and execution of calibration postponement is disabled (that is, the power is turned on regardless of whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or not). Since calibration is sometimes executed), compared to the case where processing related to the probability set value is performed after calibration, or when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the calibration is executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. , The time from when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on until the game can be played can be shortened.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the present invention is not limited to the case where the main body frame (front frame 12) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) are closed, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the process related to the probability set value that can be executed in parallel with the calibration is not limited to the process (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability set value change state.
Specifically, for example, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to execute the processes (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability set value change state as the process related to the probability set value, and the probability set value. Probability setting value change process (step S108)
It may be possible to execute the process corresponding to.
It is also possible to configure the process so that both the process related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12) and the process related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) are not executed. In this case, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, a part of the processing (predetermined game control processing (for example, steps S1 to 1)) in the main processing (FIGS. 54 to 55).
In addition to S47)), the remaining processing of the main processing (for example, steps S48 to S59) and timer interrupt processing (FIG. 4) can be performed. As a result, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the processes (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability set value change state can be executed as the process related to the probability set value, and the probability as the process related to the probability set value. The set value change process (step S108) can be executed.

Further, the game machine 10 of this modified example is provided with a radio wave sensor (panel radio wave sensor 62 or a frame radio wave sensor (not shown)), and when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, radio wave fraud monitoring by the radio wave sensor is started, and calibration is performed. It can be configured to start magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) monitoring by the magnetic sensor 61 at the end (see FIG. 53).
With this configuration, it is possible to monitor radio wave fraud in parallel with calibration.

《Notification》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) can execute a plurality of types of notifications. Specifically, for example, a volume notification for notifying the current volume and a current brightness (LE).
Brightness notification for notifying D and the brightness of the liquid crystal), error notification for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error, instruction notification for notifying a predetermined instruction to the player, and the like are possible.

In the volume notification, for example, the volume image G11 for notifying the current volume value is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the player's volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 56A, for example, the volume image G11 can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information) or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, but the decorative special symbol (identification information) It cannot be displayed while the stop display or the power failure recovery screen is displayed.
Further, in the luminance notification, for example, a luminance image for notifying the current luminance value is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the player's luminance change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 56A, for example, the luminance image can be displayed during the variable display of the special decorative symbol or the display of the customer waiting demo screen, as in the volume image G11, but the special decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It cannot be displayed while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
That is, the variable display period of the special decorative symbol and the display period of the customer waiting demo screen are the volume image G.
11 and the brightness image can be displayed, and the stop display period of the special decorative symbol and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are the display impossible period (non-display period) in which the volume image G11 and the brightness image cannot be displayed. Is.

56 (b) to (e), 57, and 58 show an example of volume notification. Since the same processing as the volume notification is performed in the luminance notification, the description of the luminance notification using the drawings will be omitted.
The volume can be adjusted within a predetermined range (for example, 5 steps from 1 to 5) by performing a volume changing operation using a predetermined operating means (for example, a cross key (not shown)). The volume change operation includes an increase operation for increasing the volume and a decrease operation for decreasing the volume, which are different operations.

FIG. 57 shows a timing chart when a short press operation is performed as a volume change operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the player performs a volume change operation during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t10).
Adjust the volume in 1). Here, since the increasing operation is performed as the volume changing operation, the volume is increased by one step (from 3 to 4). In addition, the volume image G11 for notifying the current volume (volume after the change) is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume (FIG. 56). (B)-(c)).

Next, the effect control device 300 erases the volume image G11 when a predetermined volume image display time elapses (t103) after detecting the volume change operation.
However, the volume image G11 cannot be displayed while the special decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a). Therefore, if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped before the predetermined volume image display time elapses, the volume image G11 is deleted when the variable display is stopped. On the other hand, the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation (for example, the sound of "picone") is output until the operation sound is completed even if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle of the operation sound. ..

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol is started between the detection of the volume change operation and the elapse of the predetermined volume image display time (t104 to t107). The effect control device 300 is the volume image G at the time when the stop display is started (t105).
The display of No. 11 is stopped, but the output of the operation sound is not stopped (see FIGS. 56 (d) to 56 (e)). As a result, the player can recognize that the volume change operation has been normally accepted.
That is, when the display time of the volume image G11 is shorter than usual, the player may feel uneasy that the volume change operation has not been normally accepted. However, in the case of the present embodiment, the volume image G11 Even if the display time of is shorter than usual, the output time of the operation sound is the same as usual (that is, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption), so the player can normally accept the volume change operation and change the volume. It can be recognized that (volume adjustment) has been made.
The same applies to the brightness notification. That is, if the variation display of the decorative special symbol is stopped between the detection of the luminance change operation and the elapse of the predetermined luminance image display time, the display of the luminance image is stopped when the variation display is stopped. The output of the operation sound is not stopped.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the player performs a volume change operation during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t108), but the volume is changed. The image G11 is not displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is not adjusted.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the volume change operation is detected again (t112) during the period from the detection of the volume change operation to the elapse of the predetermined volume image display time (t110 to t113).
If so, the effect control device 300 resets the count of the volume image display time when the volume change operation is rediscovered. Therefore, the volume image G11 is not erased when the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the previous volume change operation elapses (t113), and the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last volume change operation elapses. It is erased at the time (t115).
Further, when the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation when the volume is the upper limit (or the lower limit), the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11 but does not output the operation sound or adjust the volume.

FIG. 58 shows a timing chart when a long press operation is performed as a volume change operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the player performs a volume change operation during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t12).
In 1), the volume image G11 that adjusts the volume and notifies the current volume is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, the volume change operation is a long press operation (for example, a press operation longer than the output time of the operation sound).
In the case of, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume in a predetermined time cycle (t123, t1).
25) Moreover, the operation sound is output according to the adjustment of the volume, and the volume image G11 is updated and displayed according to the adjustment of the volume.

Next, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol is started during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 stops the display of the volume image G11 at the time when the stop display is started (t126). , The output of the operation sound is not stopped.
Further, even if the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the effect control device 300 does not display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, or adjust the volume. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, even if the player's volume change operation (long press operation) is continued during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. Is not done.

Next, when the variable display of the decorative special symbol starts during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume at the time when the variable display starts (t128), and now The volume image G11 for notifying the volume of the above is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, when the volume change operation (long press operation) is completed (t130), the effect control device 300
Is the time when the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last detected volume change operation has elapsed (t).
The volume image G11 is erased in 131).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation when the volume is the upper limit (or lower limit), the volume image G11 is displayed, but the operation sound is output. And the volume are not adjusted (t129 to t130).

On the other hand, in the error notification, for example, an error image G12 for notifying the content of the error is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 56A, for example, the error image G12 can be displayed not only during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information) or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, but also the decorative special symbol (identification information). ) Can be displayed while the stop display or the power failure recovery screen is displayed.
Here, the main errors are as follows. For example, a switch abnormality error indicating that the switch connector is disconnected, a shoot ball out error indicating that there is no game ball to be paid out, an overflow error indicating that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be paid out, Examples include a payout error indicating that the payout control device 200 is abnormal, a front frame opening error indicating that the glass frame 15 is open, and a game machine frame opening error indicating that the front frame 12 is open. ..

In addition, a frame radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave was detected in the front frame 12, a board radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave was detected in the game board 30, a magnetic error indicating that an abnormal magnetism was detected, and special fluctuations. A large winning opening fraud error indicating that an illegal winning to the winning device 38 was detected, a general electric wave fraud error indicating that an illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 was detected, and vibration exceeding a certain intensity were detected. A vibration error indicating that is also listed as an error. In particular, it sorts whether or not it passes through a specific area in the variable winning device, and monitors a vibration error in the case of a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through a specific area. Although it is often done, other gaming machines may also be monitored.

In addition, a right-handed error indicating that a right-handed hit was detected in a game state in which a left-handed hit should be made,
A left-handed error indicating that a left-handed hit is detected in a gaming state in which a right-handed hit should be made is also mentioned as an error. Regarding the right-handed error and the left-handed error, the effect control device 300 monitors the establishment of a predetermined condition for ending the error notification without transmitting a command to the effect that the error has been resolved from the game control device 100. The abnormality notification is terminated when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, in the instruction notification, for example, an instruction image for notifying the content of the instruction is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 56A, for example, the instruction image can be displayed not only during the variable display of the special decoration symbol or the display of the customer waiting demo screen, as well as the stop of the special decoration symbol, as in the error image G12. It can be displayed while it is being displayed or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
Here, the instructions include, for example, a left-handed instruction instructing a left-handed player in a game state in which a left-handed player should be hit, a right-handed player instructing a right-handed player in a right-handed game state, and the like. Can be mentioned.
That is, the variable display period of the special decorative symbol, the stop display period of the special decorative symbol, the display period of the customer waiting demo screen, and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are displayable periods in which the error image G12 and the instruction image can be displayed.

56 (f) to 56 (h) show an example of error notification. Since the same processing as the error notification is performed in the instruction notification, the description of the instruction notification using the drawings will be omitted.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (f) to 56 (g), if the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), an error (here, a front frame opening error or a game) An error image G12 for notifying the machine frame opening error) is displayed on the display device 41. Error image G1
2 is erased, for example, when the corresponding error is resolved.

The error image G12 can be displayed even during the stop display of the special decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), for example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (h), the error image G12 is
Even if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle, it is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved. Similarly, in the case of the instruction image, even if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle, the instruction image is continuously displayed without being erased until the display period of the instruction image ends.
Note that FIGS. 56 (f) to 56 (h) illustrate the case where an error occurs during the variable display of the special decorative symbol, but the same applies when an error occurs during the stop display of the special decorative symbol. The error image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and is deleted when the error is not detected.

In this way, the notification image (error image G12 or instruction image; hereinafter, "error image G12 or instruction image" is used in the error notification or instruction notification, rather than the notification image (volume image G11 or brightness image; hereinafter referred to as "first notification image") in the volume notification or brightness notification. The "second broadcast image") can be displayed for a longer period of time. This is because error notification and instruction notification are more important than volume notification and brightness notification.
On the other hand, the decorative special symbol is variablely displayed during the execution of the special figure variable display game, and is stopped and displayed at the end of the special figure variable display game. That is, the decorative special symbol (stop symbol) in the stop display is
Since the result of the special figure variable display game is notified, the player is more interested in the decorative special symbol during the stop display than the decorative special symbol during the variable display. In addition, among the screens displayed when the power is restored, the customer waiting demo screen is displayed when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the customer waiting state is restarted by restoring the power, and is displayed when the power is restored. Of these, the power failure recovery screen shows the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game interrupted by the power cutoff) and the special game state (the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state and the power is restored. Displayed when resuming a special game state that was interrupted due to a power failure. That is, the power failure recovery screen is
Special figure fluctuation display Since it is displayed when a power failure occurs during a game or a special game state and notifies that the player has recovered from the power failure, the power failure recovery screen is better for the player than the customer waiting demo screen. Highly interested.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen that are of great interest to the player as much as possible, the first notification image, which is less important, is displayed while the special symbol is stopped or the power is cut off. It is not displayed while the recovery screen is displayed. Specifically, the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) can be displayed together with the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen, while the first notification image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) can be displayed. It is not displayed together with the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen. That is, by adding a priority to be displayed to the notification image, the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen should be hindered, and the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen should be hindered. It is possible to distinguish from the notification image that should not be displayed. Therefore, since the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen is ensured as much as possible, improvement in game playability can be expected, and the notification image (second notification image) in the error notification and the instruction notification is the stop of the decorative special symbol. Since it can be displayed while it is being displayed or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed, errors (including fraud) are unlikely to occur, and even if they do occur, they can be dealt with immediately.

Here, in the present invention, in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41,
The concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used. A scenario is, for example, a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario, etc., and a display effect such as a pattern variation effect is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) in advance as a table. It is a method to generate a picture on one screen by setting, controlling them individually as scenarios, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
The plurality of display layers (scenario layers) are individually categorized for each display element, such as the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, and so on, and each of them independently displays a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying the effect.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the production of the display device 41 are "background", "left symbol", "right symbol", "middle symbol", "notice 1 character", and "notice 2". It is divided into eight elements: "character", "hold display (decorative special figure start memory display)", and "small design".
Then, a scenario table for a display effect such as a variable effect is created by being divided into each of a plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes "background control scenario table", "left symbol control scenario table", "right symbol control scenario table", "middle symbol control scenario table", and "notice 1 character control scenario". It is created by being divided into eight elements: "table", "preliminary notice 2 character control scenario table", "hold display control scenario table", and "small symbol control scenario table".
Further, each display element is composed of a display layer, and these plurality of display layers are sequentially overlapped from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layer includes a "background layer", a "left symbol layer", and a "right symbol layer".
There are 12 types of "medium symbol layer", "notice A layer" to "notice F layer", "holding layer", and "small symbol layer".

The effect control device 300 is the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 32).
In, the predetermined images are V in the order of the number of the motion management areas as many as the number of motion management areas.
A process of drawing in the virtual drawing space of the RAM 326 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined image into the virtual drawing space) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 59, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas from a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11. The drawing areas are arranged in numerical order of the corresponding motion management areas, and a display layer on which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first creates a "background layer" on which a predetermined image is drawn in the virtual drawing space when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "preliminary A layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.

Hereinafter, similarly, when the data of the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the "left symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 of the virtual drawing space, and then,
"Right symbol layer" when the data in the address area of the motion management area 4 is not NULL
Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 of the virtual drawing space, and then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "middle symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 of the virtual drawing space. Then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the "notice C layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 of the virtual drawing space, and then the address area of the motion management area 7 Data is NU
If it is not LL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 of the virtual drawing space, and then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the "holding layer" is stored in the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8, and then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the "notice E layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space, and then When the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL. The "small symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 of the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is completed.

When the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the drawing area is left blank because the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL,
Since the display layer (“preliminary F layer” in the case of the present invention) is not stored in the motion management area 10 drawing area of the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326, the motion management area 10 drawing area remains blank. It is also possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers while packing them in front).
In that case, since the drawing area for storing the display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers constituting one display screen, the display layer is stored every time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space. It is necessary to search for the drawing area to be stored (that is, the drawing area on the frontmost (head) side of the blank drawing area), which complicates the processing. On the other hand, as in the present invention, display is performed by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen). Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer each time the layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially overlapped from the back side (lower layer side) of the screen to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the "background layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the head of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest on the screen. The "small symbol layer" that is arranged on the side (bottom layer) and stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas is arranged on the front side (top layer) of the screen. Will be done.

In such an effect control, when the effect screen (display screen) is generated, it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are individually set. By controlling as a scenario and synthesizing all the scenarios in the form of a display layer, a one-screen picture is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws a first broadcast image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) on a predetermined display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), and the first broadcast image is generated. A second broadcast image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen from the displayed display layer to be drawn. Specifically, for example, when the first broadcast image is "notice C layer", the second broadcast image is one of "notice D layer", "notice E layer", and "notice F layer". Is drawn on.

Therefore, when a display screen including both the first broadcast image and the second broadcast image is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the second broadcast image (error image G12 or instruction). (Image, etc.) is displayed on the front side of the first broadcast image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.). Therefore, when the display area of the first broadcast image and the display area of the second broadcast image overlap, the portion of the first broadcast image that overlaps with the second broadcast image is hidden by the second broadcast image and is not visible. It will be possible. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (b), the upper part of the first broadcast image (volume image G11) is hidden by the second broadcast image (error image G12) and cannot be visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (c), for example, the effect control device 300 is at least one of a predetermined display layer (for example, "background layer", "notice A layer", and "notice B layer". A customer waiting demo screen and a power failure recovery screen are created using the display layer), and the first notification image (volume image G11 and brightness image) is placed on the display layer in front of the display layer used for the customer waiting demo screen and power failure recovery screen. Etc.) and the second broadcast image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) are drawn.
Therefore, when the first broadcast image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen, the first broadcast image is displayed on the front side of the customer waiting demo screen. When the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen, the second notification image is on the front side of the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen. Is displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 56 (b) to 56 (e) and 60 (b), the variable display area of the special decorative symbol and the display area of the first broadcast image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) overlap. I'm doing it
Not limited to this. The variable display area of the special decorative symbol and the display area of the first broadcast image do not have to overlap. Specifically, for example, the display area of the second broadcast image overlaps with the variable display area of the special decorative symbol, but the display area of the first broadcast image does not overlap with the variable display area of the special decorative symbol. The display area of the broadcast image may be set.
Further, while the second broadcast image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is being displayed, control may be executed to forcibly stop the variable display of the decorative special symbol.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. The first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image)) is used as a notification corresponding to a predetermined intervention (for example, an act that causes an error such as a volume change operation, a brightness change operation, or a fraudulent act, or a method of hitting) on the game machine 10. G11 and brightness image)) are displayed on the display device 41, and the second notification display (second notification image (for example, error image G12 and instruction image)) is displayed on the display device 41.
The first notification display is in a variable display state and in a customer waiting state in which a game is not being performed (for example, a customer waiting demo screen is being displayed), which is provided with a notification means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the notification displayed on the screen. ), While it is hidden during the stop display, the second notification display can be displayed during the variable display and the customer waiting state, and can also be displayed during the stop display (FIG. 56 (a)). )reference).

That is, the predetermined notification display is classified into a second notification display that can be displayed during the stop display of the identification information (decorative special symbol) and a first notification display that cannot be displayed during the stop display of the identification information. Therefore, the notification display can be suitably displayed so that the visibility of the stop symbol is ensured as much as possible. Specifically, for example, by setting the low-importance notification display as the first notification display and the high-importance notification display as the second notification display, the low-importance notification display is displayed together with the stop symbol. Therefore, the notification display can be suitably displayed without hindering the visibility of the stop symbol due to the notification display having a low importance.
The volume image G11 (first notification display) is not limited to the meter image in which the volume value is represented by a meter value, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the volume image G11 may be a numerical image in which the volume value is represented by a numerical value. ..
Further, the first notification display is not limited to the volume image G11 and the luminance image, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the second notification display is not limited to the error image G12 and the instruction image, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or luminance image)) is hidden while the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the display device 41. (See FIG. 56 (a)).
With this configuration, the first notification display does not interfere with the visibility of the power failure recovery screen, and the notification display can be suitably displayed.
In the present embodiment, the second notification display (second notification image (for example, error image G12 or instruction image)) can be displayed while the power failure recovery screen is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is,
The second notification display may be hidden while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display screen displayed on the display device 41 is created by a plurality of stacked display layers, and the first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or brightness image)). ))) And the second notification display (for example, the error image G12 or the instruction image), the display layer for displaying the second notification display displays the first notification display. It can be configured to be located on the upper layer side (front side of the screen) of the display layer for the purpose (see FIG. 60A).
With this configuration, the second notification display can be displayed with priority over the first notification display.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment notifies predetermined information according to a predetermined operation (for example, volume change operation or brightness change operation) of the player in the game machine provided with the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. A display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or brightness image)) on the display device 41, and speakers 19a, 19b for operating sounds according to a predetermined operation of the player. The display control means includes an output control means (effect control device 300) for outputting from, and the display control means has a non-display period (for example, a stop display period of identification information) for prohibiting the display of the notification display during the display of the notification display. When the display period of the power failure recovery screen) starts, the display of the notification display is stopped, and the output control means continues to output the operation sound even if the non-display period starts during the output of the operation sound. (FIGS. 56 (d) to (e), t105 to t1 in FIG. 57.
09, see t126 to t128 in FIG. 58).

That is, since the notification display is provided with a non-display period, the notification display can be suitably displayed so that the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen is ensured as much as possible. In particular,
For example, by setting the stop display period of the identification information (decorative special symbol) and the display period of the power failure recovery screen as the non-display period, the notification display will not be displayed together with the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen. The notification display can be suitably displayed without interfering with the visibility of the stop symbol or the power failure recovery screen.
Further, even if the display time of the notification display is shortened due to the start of the non-display period, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption, so that the player can recognize that the predetermined operation has been normally accepted. ..
The notification display for which the non-display period is set is not limited to the volume image G11 or the luminance image and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the error image G12 or the instruction image may be used.

《Button production》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) sets the operation validity period by the image displayed on the display device 41 as a button effect intervening the operation of the effect button 25 by the player. It is possible to execute a button effect for notifying and a button effect for notifying the operation validity period by the light emission of the effect button 25.
Specifically, the effect control device 300 can execute the first type button effect, the second type button effect, and the third type button effect.

In the first type of button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (b), when the button effect starts, the display device 41 has a button image G21 imitating the effect button 25 and the remaining operation valid period. The remaining length notification image G22 (here, the time bar image) for notifying the length and the operation mode instruction image G23 for instructing the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, "press!" Or "continuous hit!"
(Character image such as) and the effect change image G24 (here, meter image) that changes by operating the effect button 25 are displayed. That is, in the first type of button production,
The image displayed on the display device 41 can notify that the operation is valid and the remaining length of the operation valid period.

The second type of button effect is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (c) to 62 (d), when the button effect is started, the effect button 25 switches from the off state to the light emitting state (for example, the lit state). .. That is, in the second type of button effect, it is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period by the light emission of the effect button 25.
In the third type of button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (f), when the button effect starts, the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the like are displayed on the display device 41, and the button effect is displayed. This is an effect in which the effect button 25 switches from the off state to the light emitting state. That is, in the third type of button effect, it is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period and the remaining length of the operation valid period by the image displayed on the display device 41, and the effect button 25
It is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period by the light emission of.

In the case of the first type of button effect, since the remaining length notification image G22 is displayed, it is possible to notify not only the operation valid period but also the remaining length of the operation valid period. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the player select when to operate the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, or to remind the player to operate the effect button 25 because the end of the operation valid period is approaching. Can be done.
Further, in the case of the second type of button effect, since the effect button 25 emits light, the player's attention to the effect button 25 can be improved. Further, since it is unknown when the light emission of the effect button 25 is extinguished (that is, when the operation validity period ends is unknown), it is possible to remind the player to operate the effect button 25 as soon as possible before the light emission is extinguished. it can.
Further, in the present embodiment, not only the first type button effect and the second type button effect but also the third type button effect combining the first type and the second type can be executed, so that various buttons can be executed. You can perform the production, it will not be monotonous, and the interest will increase.
In the following description, when the first type button effect, the second type button effect, and the third type button effect are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a button effect.

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first type of button effect.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 63A. That is, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special symbol.
If the special figure variation display game is a game that executes the first type of button effect,
As shown in FIG. 63 (b), for example, the effect control device 300 starts the first type of button effect during the execution of the special figure variation display game. As a result, the button image G is displayed on the display device 41.
21, the remaining length notification image G22, the operation mode instruction image G23, and the effect change image G24 are displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, the effect control device 300 determines the value of the effect change image G24 (here, as shown in FIGS. 63 (c), (d), and (e)). Meter value) is increased.
Then, when the operation valid period is timed up, the effect control device 300 can be used, for example, in FIG. 63 (
As shown in f), the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the operation mode instruction image G2.
3 is erased to notify the result of the button effect.

In the present embodiment, the start timing and execution time of the button effect are set so that the button effect starts after the variable display of the special decorative symbol starts and the button effect ends before the variable display of the special decorative symbol ends. Has been done. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period related to the button effect is within the variable display period of the decorative special symbol.

The button effects of the present embodiment include a button effect with a low expectation level (a button effect with a low expectation) and a button effect with a medium expectation level (a button effect with a medium expectation). , There is a button production with a high expectation level (button production with a high expectation).
Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order and reach does not occur in the special figure variation display game, it is expected as a button effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game. If the button effect with a low degree level is most likely to be selected, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, and the reach of SP reach or higher occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure is concerned. As the button effect to be executed in the figure variation display game, the button effect with the expectation level of "high" is most likely to be selected, and in other cases, the button effect with the expectation level of "medium" is most likely to be selected. There is.

Then, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 64A, the expected degree level of the amount of change in the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) per operation of the effect button 25 is “low”. In the case of, it is set to "+1", when the expectation level is "medium", it is set to "+2", and when the expectation level is "high", it is set to "+3". Therefore, the expected level of the button effect being executed can be suggested by the amount of change in the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25.

In the example shown in FIG. 63, each time the effect button 25 is operated once, the effect change image G24
Since the meter value of (meter image) is increased by "2", it can be seen that the button effect with the expectation level of "medium" is being executed.
The amount of change shown in FIG. 64A may be the amount of change until the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) reaches a predetermined threshold value. Specifically, for example, in the case of a button effect having an expectation level of "high", the meter value increases by "3" each time the effect button 25 is operated until the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value. (That is, it changes with the amount of change shown in FIG. 64A), and after the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value, the amount of increase in the meter value per operation of the effect button 25 gradually decreases, and then After the meter value reaches the upper limit value, the meter value reaches the upper limit value when the button effect is successful (for example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special result). On the other hand, if the button effect fails, the meter value does not reach the upper limit (that is, the meter value does not change even if the effect button 25 is operated).
It may be configured as follows. That is, the amount of change of the effect changing image G24 in one button effect may be fixed, or may be changed according to the state of the effect change image G24 and the progress of the button effect.
Further, the effect change image G24 (meter image) is not limited to the one in which the meter value increases according to the operation of the effect button 25. That is, the effect change image G24 (meter image) is
The meter value may decrease according to the operation of the effect button 25. In that case, the amount of change in the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) per operation of the effect button 25 is For example, when the expectation level is "low", it is set to "-1" and the expectation level is "-1".
If it is "medium", it is set to "-2", and if the expectation level is "high", it is set to "-3".

Here, in the volume notification, for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (c) to 64 (d), the amount of change in the volume image G11 per increase operation is always "+1", for example, FIGS. 64 (e) to (d). As shown in f), the amount of change in the volume image G11 per reduction operation is always "-1". The same applies to the brightness notification. Therefore, when adjusting the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.), the absolute value of the amount of change in the image (for example, volume image G, brightness image) with respect to one operation is constant. This makes it possible to make reliable adjustments.
On the other hand, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the absolute value of the amount of change in the image (for example, the effect change image G24) for one operation is not constant. That is, when participating in the production, since the absolute value of the amount of change in the image for one operation is given a variation, it is possible to execute a non-monotonous and interesting button production, and the production button 25 The function can be fully exerted.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the second type button effect and the third type button effect, the emission color of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect. Therefore, the emission color of the effect button 25 can indicate the expected level of the button effect being executed.
The display color of the button image G21 may be different depending on the expected level of the button effect. Further, when configured in this way, the display color of the button image G21 and the emission color of the effect button 25 in the third type of button effect may or may not be the same.

Further, the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is not limited to the lighting state. That is, the light emitting state of the effect button 25 may be a blinking state. Further, when the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is a blinking state, the blinking speed of the effect button 25 can be configured to be different according to the expected level of the button effect.
It is also possible to configure the effect button 25 to indicate the remaining length of the operation valid period depending on the light emitting state. Specifically, for example, the blinking speed of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually increase (or decrease), or the emission color of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually approach a predetermined color. Alternatively, it is controlled so that it stays lit while the remaining length of the operation valid period is equal to or longer than the predetermined length, and blinks while the remaining length of the operation valid period is less than the predetermined length. You may.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the effect change image G24 is executed during the execution of the second type button effect.
Is not displayed, but it is also possible to display the effect change image G24 in the second type button effect. In the second type of button effect, the expected degree level can be suggested by the emission color of the effect button 25, so that it is not necessary to suggest the expected degree level by the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, when the effect change image G24 is displayed in the second type button effect, the amount of change of the effect change image G24 may differ depending on the expected level of the button effect, or the button effect may be displayed. It may be constant regardless of the expectation level.
Further, in the third type button effect in which the first type button effect and the second type button effect are executed in duplicate, the start timing of the first type button effect and the start of the second type button effect The timing may be different. Specifically, for example, the first type button effect is started first to fade in the button image G21, and the second type button effect is started at the same time as the button image G21 completely appears. Then, the effect button 25 may be switched to the light emitting state.

Further, the effect changing image G24 is not limited to the meter image in which the meter value increases (or decreases) according to the operation of the operating means, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the effect changing image G24 may be, for example, a numerical image whose numerical value increases (or decreases) according to the operation of the operating means.
Further, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that moves according to the operation of the operating means. In this case, the movement amount of the character image is the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, the amount of movement of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect.
Further, the effect changing image G24 may be a character image that is enlarged (or reduced) according to the operation of the operating means. In this case, the enlargement ratio (or reduction ratio) of the character image is produced. This is the amount of change in the change image G24. That is, the enlargement ratio (or reduction ratio) of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. Operation means that can be operated by the player (effect button 25 and cross key (not shown))
Display control means (effect control) capable of displaying the first display (for example, volume image G11 or luminance image) and the second display (for example, effect change image G24) on the display device 41 as displays that change according to the operation of the operation means. In the first display, the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is constant, and in the second display, the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is a predetermined condition (device 300). For example
It depends on the expected degree of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed).

Therefore, by setting the first display in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is constant as an adjustment image (for example, a volume image G or a brightness image) that changes according to the operation for adjusting the gaming environment. , It is possible to make reliable adjustments. Further, the second display in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation differs according to a predetermined condition is set as the effect change image G24 that changes according to the operation in the button effect, which is not monotonous and highly interesting. It becomes possible to execute a button effect. That is, by operating the operating means, it is possible to make reliable adjustments and participate in an interesting button production, so that the operating means are actively operated, and the operating means Can be used effectively.

The first display is not limited to the adjusted image (for example, volume image G or luminance image) and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second display is not limited to the effect changing image G24 and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation of changing the first display and the operation of changing the second display may be performed by using the same operating means.
Further, the predetermined condition is not limited to the expected degree of the special figure variation display game being executed (big hit expectation or reach expectation) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the expectation of the special figure variation display game before execution can be used. There may be. This makes it possible to suggest the result of the look-ahead determination by the second display.
Further, the first display and the second display may be displayed not only during the variable display of the identification information but also during the big hit (special game state) or during the display of the customer waiting screen.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first display (adjustment image (for example, volume image G or luminance image)) is hidden during the period when the identification information (decorative special symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 56). (See (a)), the operation validity period is not notified for the operation corresponding to the first display, the operation validity period is notified for the operation corresponding to the second display, and the identification information changes as the operation validity period. It can be configured to be notified of a period that fits within the displayed period (see FIG. 63).

With this configuration, for example, when a display screen including both the first display and the second display is displayed on the display device 41, the operation of changing the first display and the operation of changing the second display can be performed. It is possible to suggest which operation should be prioritized. That is, while the operation valid period is not notified for the operation corresponding to the first display, the operation for changing the second display is preferentially performed by notifying the operation valid period for the operation corresponding to the second display. Can suggest what to do. Therefore, for example, by setting the second display to the effect changing image G24 that changes according to the operation in the button effect, the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.) was adjusted, so that the button effect could not be participated. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of and prevent the deterioration of the interest.

During the non-display period during which the first display is hidden, the operation of changing the first display is enabled to internally change the first display (that is, the game environment such as volume and brightness is adjusted. )
You may do so.
Further, during the period when the second display is not displayed, the operation of changing the second display may be enabled or disabled.
The temporary stop of the identification information (decorative special symbol) is not included in the stop display of the identification information, but the identification information is included in the variable display. Therefore, even if the stop display period of the identification information is the non-display period in which the display of the first display (adjusted image (for example, volume image G or luminance image)) is prohibited, the first display is during the temporary stop of the identification information. It can be displayed.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed in a game machine provided with a display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. An operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by a person and a notification means (effect control device 300) that notifies the operation validity period of the operation means are provided, and the notification mode of the operation validity period is set during the operation validity period. The first notification mode (see FIG. 62 (b)) in which it is possible to recognize that there is, and the remaining time of the operation valid period can be recognized, and it is possible to recognize that the operation is in the valid period, and the operation valid period. The second notification mode (see FIG. 62 (d)) in which the remaining time of the above cannot be recognized, and
The first notification mode and the second notification mode can be used alone or in combination with each other (see FIG. 62).

That is, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation effective period is notified only in the first notification mode, an effect in which the operation effective period is notified only in the second notification mode, and a first. It is possible to perform an effect in which the operation validity period is notified in both the first notification mode and the second notification mode. Therefore, since it is possible to execute various effects as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened without becoming monotonous.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 62B) uses an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color (in the case of the present embodiment, the backlight of the display device 41). The second notification mode (see FIG. 62 (d)) is an assembly of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors (in the case of the present embodiment, a group of light emitting elements built in the effect button 25). Can be configured to notify the operation validity period using.
With this configuration, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation validity period is notified only by a set of monochromatic light sources of the same color and a set of monochromatic light sources of multiple colors It is possible to execute an effect in which the operation validity period is notified only by the body and an effect in which the operation validity period is notified by both an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color and an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of multiple colors. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened without becoming monotonous.

The aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color is not limited to the backlight of the display device 41 and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, an aggregate (monochromatic lamp or the like) of monochromatic light sources of the same color that emits light during the operation effective period may be provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15.
Further, the aggregate of the monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors is not limited to the light emitting element group built in the effect button 25, and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, an aggregate (multicolor lamp or the like) of a plurality of color monochromatic light sources that emit light during the operation effective period may be provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the first notification mode (see FIG. 62B), the operation valid period is based on the image displayed on the display device 41 (for example, the button image G21 or the remaining length notification image G22). The second notification mode (see FIG. 62 (d)) can be configured to notify the operation validity period by causing the operation means (effect button 25) to emit light.
With this configuration, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation validity period is notified only by the image displayed on the display device 41 and an operation by only the light emission of the operation means are performed. It is possible to execute an effect of notifying the validity period and an effect of notifying the operation validity period by both the image displayed on the display device 41 and the light emission of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened without becoming monotonous.

《Production number notification production》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) is a payout notification effect for notifying the total number of payouts, and is the total payout from the start of the special game state to the present time during the special game state. The first payout number notification effect that notifies the number, and the second payout number notification effect that notifies the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time during the special game state (first hit) and the subsequent time saving state. Is feasible.
In the present embodiment, the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is defined as the total number of payouts. The total number of payouts is not limited to the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening and the general winning opening It may be the sum of the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to 35.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the first payout number notification effect.
The first payout number notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that does not cause a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result and the special result is a special result that does not cause a time saving state, the effect control device 300 , When the special game state based on the special result starts, the first payout number notification effect is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the acquired cumulative number image G31 that notifies the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time. Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 (b) to 65 (d), each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, for example, "+14" is added to the total number of payouts.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), when the special gaming state ends, the effect control device 300 ends the first payout number notification effect and erases the acquired cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 (f) to 65 (j), the upper plate 21 is in the middle of the special gaming state.
When an overflow error indicating that the lower plate 23 is filled with the game balls and cannot be paid out occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. This error image G1
As shown in FIG. 65 (j), for example, even if the special gaming state ends in the middle, 2 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved.
Note that FIGS. 65 (f) to 65 (j) exemplify a case where an overflow error occurs in the middle of the special game state, but similarly, an error occurs when another error occurs in the middle of the special game state. The image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and even if the special gaming state ends in the middle, the image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 66 shows an example of the second payout number notification effect.
The second payout number notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that causes a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result and the special result is a special result that causes a time saving state, the effect control device 3
When the special gaming state based on the special result starts, 00 starts the second payout number notification effect. As a result, the display device 41 displays the acquired cumulative number image G31 that notifies the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time. Then, for each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, for example, "+14" is added to the total number of payouts.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (b) to 66 (d), in the second payout number notification effect, the display of the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed even after the special game state (first hit) ends and the time saving state starts. Will be continued.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (e), when the time saving state ends, the effect control device 300 ends the second payout number notification effect and erases the acquired cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (f) to 66 (j), it is shown that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be paid out in the middle of the time saving state (including the first hit). When an overflow error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 66 (j), for example, the error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved even if the time saving state ends in the middle.
Note that FIGS. 66 (f) to 66 (j) exemplify a case where an overflow error occurs in the middle of the time saving state, but similarly, when another error occurs in the middle of the time saving state, the error image G12 Is displayed when an error is detected, and even if the time saving state ends in the middle, it is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 67A shows an example of the display / non-display timing of the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the error image G12.
For example, as shown in FIG. 67A, when a special gaming state based on a special result that does not generate a time saving state starts, the first payout number notification effect starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed on the display device 4.
Displayed at 1 (t151).
Then, when an error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t15).
2).

Next, when the special gaming state ends, the first payout number notification effect ends, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted (t153).
Then, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t154).

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, when the special gaming state based on the special result that generates the time saving state starts, the second payout number notification effect starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed on the display device 41. It is displayed (t155).
Then, when the special gaming state ends, the time saving state starts (t156).

The result of the special figure variation display game is special before the time saving state ends (that is, before the number of executions of the special figure variation display game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) after the end of the last special game state). As a result, if the special result is a special result that does not cause a time saving state,
When the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the time saving state ends. Therefore, in that case, when the special figure variation display game ends, the second payout notification effect ends and the first payout notification effect starts.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result before the time saving state ends and the special result is a special result that causes the time saving state, the time saving state is extended. Therefore,
In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, the second payout number notification effect continues even after the special figure variation display game ends.

Then, when an error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t15).
9).
Next, when the time saving state ends, the second payout number notification effect ends, and the acquired cumulative number image G3
1 is erased (t160).
Then, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t161).

In this way, in the first payout number notification effect, when the special game state starts, the total number of acquired images G3
1 is displayed, and when the special game state ends, the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted. on the other hand,
In the second payout number notification effect, the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed when the special game state (first hit) starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted when the time saving state ends. That is, the first
The display period of the acquired cumulative number image G31 is different between the payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect.
Although not shown in FIG. 56A, the error image G also indicates the period during which the special gaming state occurs.
12 and the displayable period during which the instruction image can be displayed.

In the game machine 10, the player displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in one special game state and the total number of prize balls paid out in the special game state and the subsequent time saving state. By making it possible to grasp the number of game balls acquired, the interest of the game is enhanced. However, troubles are likely to occur in a state where prize balls are continuously paid out, such as in a special game state or a time saving state. As such troubles, for example, the ball is clogged in front of the inlet to the lower plate 23, and the lower plate 23 cannot be released from the full state even if the ball is removed, or a problem occurs in the payout unit and the prize ball There are troubles that cannot be paid out. When such a trouble occurs, the payout of the game ball is stopped, and an error image G12 notifying the occurrence of an error (overflow error, payout abnormality error, etc.) for stopping the payout of the game ball is displayed. ..

In order to enhance the interest of the game, rather than displaying the error image G12 that notifies the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game balls, the image that allows the player to grasp the number of game balls acquired (for example, the cumulative number of acquired images G31). In some cases, the display is prioritized, but in this case, the player may be disadvantaged because the game is stopped before all the prize balls are paid out without noticing the error.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of the error of stopping the payout of the game ball, the display of the error image G12 is prioritized over the display of the cumulative number of acquired images G31. .. Here, "priority" is to display on the front side.

That is, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws the acquired cumulative number image G31 on a predetermined display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), and the effect cumulative number image G31.
The error image G12 is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen from the display layer on which is drawn.
Specifically, for example, when the acquired cumulative number image G31 is "notice D layer", the error image G12 is drawn on the "notice E layer" or "notice F layer".
Therefore, when a display screen including both the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 (h), (i) and 66 (i), The error image G12 is displayed on the front side of the acquired cumulative number image G31. Therefore, when the display area of the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the display area of the error image G12 overlap, the portion of the acquired cumulative number image G31 that overlaps with the error image G12 is hidden by the error image G12 and cannot be visually recognized. It becomes.

By the way, the effect control device 300 can store the number of winnings in the large winning opening in the RAM 322, and the total payout is based on the number of winnings in the large winning opening from the start of the special gaming state stored in the RAM 322 to the present time. The number is calculated, and the calculated total number of payouts is notified by the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect. Alternatively, the number of payout game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the large winning opening can be stored in the RAM 322, and the number of payout game balls stored in the RAM 322 from the start of the special game state to the present time is the first total number of payouts. Payout number notification production and the second
Notify by payout number notification effect.
If a power failure occurs during the execution of the first payout number notification effect or the second payout number notification effect, the first payout number notification effect or the second payout number notification effect is resumed when the power failure is restored. However, since the RAM 322 is a storage means that cannot store and retain the stored information when the power supply to the game machine 10 is stopped, the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect resumed after the power failure is restored. , It is not possible to notify the exact total number of payouts.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68A to 68C, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the first payout number notification effect, the first payout number notification effect is performed after the power failure is restored. Is restarted. However, since the RAM 322 cannot retain the stored contents unless the electric power is supplied, the RAM 322 is restarted from the state in which the total number of payouts notified by the acquired cumulative number image G31 is cleared to 0.
The same applies to the second payout number notification effect. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (d) to 68 (f), when a power failure occurs during the execution of the second payout number notification effect, the second payout number notification effect is restarted after the power failure is restored. To. However, since the RAM 322 cannot retain the stored contents unless the electric power is supplied, the RAM 322 is restarted from the state in which the total number of payouts notified by the acquired cumulative number image G31 is cleared to 0.

In addition, when recovering from a power failure, a process is performed to check whether an error has occurred. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the error that occurred before the power failure is not resolved after the power failure is restored, the error image G12 that was displayed before the power failure is restored is displayed even after the power failure is restored. .. That is, when recovering from the power failure, the acquired cumulative number image G31 cannot be made to appear as if it was continuously displayed, but the error image G12 can be made to appear as if it was continuously displayed.

In the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in interest, a storage means (RAM 322) that cannot store the stored information when the power supply to the game machine 10 is stopped is used to win a prize in the grand prize opening. The number and the number of payout game balls are memorized. Specifically, for example, at the moment when a power failure occurs
If there is a game ball that is still rolling in the game area 32 (a game ball before entering the winning opening or the out opening), even if the game ball wins the winning opening, there is a power failure. The prize will be invalid (it cannot be counted accurately). Therefore, if the number of prizes and the number of game balls to be paid out before the power failure is retained after the power failure is restored, the total number of game balls to be paid out will not be reflected at the moment of the power failure. It will be done, and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the number of winnings to the large winning opening and the number of payout game balls are intentionally stored in a storage means that cannot retain memory.

Here, as shown in FIG. 69, for example, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 44a provided so as to be movable in front of the display device 41, and the display device 4 is within the moving range of the movable accessory 44a.
When a position overlapping with at least a part of the error image G12 displayed in 1 is included, the occurrence of the error is notified not only in the mode of displaying the error image G12 on the display device 41 but also in other modes. Is preferable.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the movable accessory 44a is a first position (position shown in FIG. 69A) retracted from the front of the display device 41 and a front of the display device 41. It is assumed that it is possible to move between at least a part of the error image G12 and a second position (position shown in FIG. 69B) overlapping the front and back. In this case, the error image G12 is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and becomes difficult to see during a part of the period during which the movable accessory 44a is moving or during the period when the movable accessory 44a is in the second position.

In this case, the player may be disadvantaged because the game is stopped before all the prize balls are paid out without noticing the error. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), in addition to the first aspect of displaying the error image G12 on the display device 41, the speakers 19a and 19
Also in the second aspect of outputting an error sound (for example, a voice saying "Please pull out the ball") from b, the occurrence of an error is notified. The error notification of the second aspect may be performed only when the effect using the movable accessory 44a is executed, or may be performed regardless of whether or not the effect using the movable accessory 44a is executed. ..
It is also possible to further dispose a light guide plate (another accessory) or the like in front of the movable accessory 44a (on the player side), and in that case, an effect by the light guide plate (an effect in which a character or the like emerges). Is likely to overlap with the error image G12, so that while the error image G12 is being displayed (that is, an error is occurring), the effect of the light guide plate (another accessory) may be stopped or interrupted.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions is a special result, the variable winning device (special variable winning device) In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that converts 38) into a state in which a game ball is easy to win, a ball number notification display (cumulative acquisition number image) that notifies the number of game balls to be paid out based on winning a prize in a variable winning device. The first display control means (effect control device 3) that displays G31) on the display device 41.
00) and an error display (00) notifying that an error has occurred to stop the payout of the game ball.
Second display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying the error image G12) on the display device 41.
The ball number notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time, and the error display has a higher display priority than the ball number notification display (see FIG. 67 (b)). It is displayed during the special game state and disappears when the special game state ends, and the error display can be displayed during the special game state and can be displayed even after the end of the special game state (FIGS. 65 and FIG. 67 (
a) See).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is prioritized over the display of the ball number notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31), and the ball number notification display is hidden when the special game state ends, but the error display. Can be displayed even after the end of the special game state, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game ball.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (
When the result of the special figure variation display game) becomes a special result, the variation winning device (special variation winning device 38) is changed in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which the game ball is easily won. The first display control means (effect control device 300) that displays on the display device 41 a ball number notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31) that notifies the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the winning device.
), And a second display control means (effect control device 300) that displays an error display (error image G12) notifying that an error for stopping the payout of the game ball has occurred on the display device 41.
After the end of the special game state, a specific game state (time saving state) different from the special game state can be generated, and the ball number notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time, and the error display is displayed rather than the ball number notification display. The display has a higher priority (see FIG. 67 (b)), the ball number notification display is displayed during the specific game state, is hidden when the specific game state ends, and the error display is in the specific game state. It can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state (FIGS. 66 and 67).
See (a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is prioritized over the display of the ball number notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31), and the ball number notification display is hidden when the specific game state ends, but the error display. Can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game ball.

The variable winning device is not limited to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a normal variable winning device 37 or a large winning opening having a V switch may be used.
Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the display priority is, the closer the image is displayed to the front side, but the display priority is not limited to this. It is preferable that the higher the display priority of the image, the higher the visibility. For example, the higher the display priority of the image, the closer to the center of the screen may be displayed, or the larger the size may be displayed. It may be displayed with a higher brightness display color, or may be displayed with a lower transmittance (that is, an image having a lower display priority is displayed so that the transparency is higher). Further, when the display timing of the first image and the display timing of the second image having a higher priority than the first image overlap, the first image is not displayed during the display of the second image. It may be displayed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the image having a higher priority is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen so that the image having a higher display priority is displayed on the front side.
Not limited to this. For example, it is possible to draw on the same display layer regardless of the display priority, in which case the image with the higher priority is displayed so that the image with the higher display priority is displayed on the front side. , Draw on the same display layer with it placed closer to you.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movable accessory 44a provided so as to be movable in front of the display device 41 and the mode in which the error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41 are different. A notification means (speakers 19a, 19b and an effect control device 300) for notifying the occurrence of an error is provided, and the moving range of the movable accessory 44a includes at least a part of the error display displayed on the display device 41 and before and after. Can be configured to include overlapping positions (
(See FIG. 69).
That is, it is possible to configure the error notification not only in the first mode in which the error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41, but also in the second mode different from the first mode.

With this configuration, the error display (error image G12) can be displayed as a movable accessory 44a.
Even if it is hidden by and becomes difficult to see, the error notification of the second aspect makes it possible to grasp the occurrence of the error, so that the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of the error of stopping the payout of the game ball is avoided. be able to.
The error notification of the second aspect is not limited to the aspect of outputting an error sound. Specifically, the error notification of the second aspect includes the display of the sub-information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. At least one of them may be used to notify the occurrence of an error. Also, the game machine 10
However, when a vibration device or a blower is provided as the effect device, it is also possible to execute the error notification of the second aspect by using the vibration device or the blower. Further, when the game machine 10 is provided with a liquid crystal display other than the display device 41, it is also possible to execute the error notification of the second aspect by using the liquid crystal display.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling a payout mechanism (payout unit) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball, and an error of stopping the payout of the game ball is caused. , A storage plate (upper plate 21) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout mechanism
And the lower plate 23) are configured to be at least one of an error indicating that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (overflow error) and an error indicating that the payout control means is abnormal (payout abnormality error). be able to.
With this configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game ball.

《Direction sound and error sound》
The game machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) includes speakers 19a and 1
From 9b, it is possible to output a production sound for producing a game and an error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error.
In a conventional game machine, an error sound is output with priority over an effect sound, that is, an error sound is output in a state where the volume of the effect sound is lowered (including a mute state).
For example, the production sound output during the special game state includes, for example, round B which is always output.
There are GM and sounds that are output during a specific period (hereinafter referred to as "limited-time sounds"). The limited-time sound is, for example, a probability variation promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and is a production sound that is of higher interest to the player than the round BGM. Therefore, if the error sound is output with priority over the limited-time sound, the interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, if the limited-time sound is output with priority over the error sound, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.
However, there are a plurality of types of errors, and depending on the type of error, it may be inconvenient to output a limited-time sound in preference to an error sound. Specifically, for example, errors related to fraudulent activity (front frame opening error, gaming machine frame opening error, frame radio wave error, board radio wave error, magnetic error, big prize opening fraud error, general electric fraud error, vibration error, etc. ) Is output with priority over the error sound for a limited time, the clerk of the game store will be late in noticing the occurrence of the error, and the game machine will be prone to fraud.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the predetermined effect sound is classified into the first effect sound and the second effect sound, and the predetermined error sound is classified into the first error sound and the second error sound. Output control is performed so that the order of priority is higher in the order of effect sound <first error sound <second effect sound <second error sound.
Specifically, for example, among the effect sounds output during the special game state, the round BGM is set as the first effect sound, and the limited-time sound such as the probability variation promotion sound is set as the second effect sound. In addition, among the error sounds that may be output during the special game state, the fraudulent non-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error that is not related to fraudulent activity such as an overflow error is set as the first error sound, and the frame opening error (frame opening error) The fraud-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error related to fraudulent activity such as the front frame opening error or the game machine frame opening error) is defined as the second error sound. That is, in the sounds output during the special game state, the output priority is higher in the order of round BGM <illegal non-related error sound <time-limited sound <illegal related error sound.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the output / non-output timing of the effect sound and the error sound.
For example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the special gaming state starts, the output of the round BGM is started (t181).
Next, when it is time to output the probabilistic promotion sound, the round BGM is in a non-output state (t182).

Since the probability variation promotion sound has a lower priority than the frame opening error sound (the error sound that notifies the occurrence of the frame opening error), the probability variation promotion sound is produced during the period when the output of the probability variation promotion sound and the output of the frame opening error sound overlap. Is in a non-output state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period during which the output of the probability variation promotion sound and the output of the frame opening error sound overlap is t182 to t183.
In addition, since the probability variation promotion sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound (error sound that notifies the occurrence of an overflow error), the overflow error sound is generated during the period when the output of the probability variation promotion sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap. It becomes a non-output state. For example, FIG. 70
In the example shown in (1), the period during which the output of the probabilistic promotion sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is t182 to t184.
Further, since the frame opening error sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound, the overflow error sound is in a non-output state during the period when the output of the frame opening error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period during which the output of the frame opening error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is t182 to t183.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the timing of outputting the probability variation promotion sound, the timing of outputting the frame opening error sound, and the timing of outputting the overflow error sound come at the same time, the probability variation promotion sound and the overflow The error sound is not output, and the frame opening error sound is output (t182). Then, when the output of the frame opening error sound ends, the probability variation promotion sound is output from the middle (t183), and when the output of the probability variation promotion sound ends, the overflow error sound is output from the middle (t184), and the overflow error sound is output. When is finished, the output of the round BGM is restarted (t185).

Here, the non-output state is a state in which reproduction is performed but output from the speakers 19a and 19b is not performed. The non-output state may be a state in which neither playback nor output from the speakers 19a and 19b is performed.
Further, in FIG. 70, an overflow error sound is illustrated as the first error sound, but the first error sound may be an illegal and unrelated error sound other than the overflow error sound.
Further, in FIG. 70, the frame opening error sound is illustrated as the second error sound, but the second error sound may be an illegally related error sound other than the frame opening error sound.
Further, in FIG. 70, the probability variation promotion sound is illustrated as the second production sound, but the second production sound is a limited-time sound other than the probability variation promotion sound (round promotion sound, V switch passing production sound, etc.). Is also good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority of the fraudulent non-related error sound is set lower than the priority of the limited-time sound from the viewpoint of securing the output opportunity of the limited-time sound as much as possible. Specifically, the fraud-related error sound has priority over the limited-time sound, while the fraud-non-related error sound has no priority over the limited-time sound. That is, by adding a priority to be output to the error sound, an error sound that should be output until the output of the limited-time sound is obstructed, and an error sound that should not be output until the output of the limited-time sound is obstructed. Can be distinguished. Therefore, since the opportunity to output the limited-time sound is secured as much as possible, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting, and the fraud-related error sound is output with priority over the limited-time sound, so that fraud is less likely to occur. , Even if it occurs, it can be dealt with immediately.

When the fraud-related error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error related to fraud is output, the fraud-related error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
In addition, when outputting a fraudulent non-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error not related to fraudulent activity,
An fraudulent non-related error image notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
In addition, when a limited-time sound (such as a probability variation promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state) is output, a limited-time image (special after the end of the special game state) is output. (Probability change promotion image, etc. that notifies that the probability state of the variable display game becomes a high probability state)
May be displayed on the display device 41.

Further, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-non-related error image, and the limited-time image may or may not be the same as the sound. That is, display control may be performed so that the priority is higher in the order of the fraudulent non-related error image <time-limited image <illegal-related error image (in the same order as the sound). Display control may be performed so that the priority is higher in the order of error image <illegal-related error image (order different from sound).
In the present embodiment, an image having a higher display priority is displayed on the front side, but the display priority is not limited to this. It is preferable that the higher the display priority of the image, the higher the visibility. For example, the higher the display priority of the image, the closer to the center of the screen may be displayed, or the larger the size may be displayed. It may be displayed with a higher brightness display color, or may be displayed with a lower transmittance (that is, an image having a lower display priority is displayed so that the transparency is higher). Further, when the display timing of the first image and the display timing of the second image having a higher priority than the first image overlap, the first image is not displayed during the display of the second image. It may be displayed.
Further, the method of displaying the image having a higher display priority on the front side may be a method of drawing the image having a higher priority on the display layer on the front side of the screen, or the method may have a higher priority. It may be a method of drawing an image having a high value on the same display layer in a state of being arranged closer to the front side.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, the output control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b and the predetermined A special game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state when the result of a game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the condition is satisfied is a special result, and an output is provided. The control means includes a first production sound (for example, round BGM) and a second production sound (for example, a second production sound) having a higher output priority than the first production sound as the production sound for producing the game during the occurrence of the special game state. (Limited time sound) can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the first error sound (for example, an illegal non-related error sound) and the first error sound are used as error sounds for notifying the occurrence of an error during the occurrence of a special gaming state. 1 Second, which has a higher output priority than the error sound
Error sounds (for example, fraud-related error sounds) can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b.
If an error occurs that outputs the second error sound when the first effect sound is output or when the second effect sound is output, the second error sound is output with priority, and the first effect sound is output when the first effect sound is output. If an error that outputs an error sound occurs, the first error sound is output with priority, and if an error that outputs the first error sound occurs when the second effect sound is output, the second effect sound is output. Is output with priority (Fig. 7)
See 0).

Therefore, since the second effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the error sound can be suitably output so that the output opportunity of the second effect sound is secured as much as possible.
Further, since the second error sound is output with priority over the first effect sound, the second effect sound, and the first error sound, for example, by setting the second error sound as an error sound related to fraud, fraud occurs. Difficult to do
Even if it occurs, it can be dealt with immediately.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a sound output means (speaker 1) capable of outputting a predetermined sound.
9a, 19b), an output control means (effect control device 300) that controls the sound output from the sound output means, a display means (display device 41) that can display a predetermined image, and control of the display means. In a game machine provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) to be performed, the output control means can change the volume of the sound output means according to a predetermined operation, and the effect sound (for example, a limited-time sound) and The first error sound (for example, an invalid unrelated error sound) for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error and the first error sound.
It is possible to output the second error sound (for example, fraud-related error sound), which has a higher output priority than the error sound, and if an error that outputs the second error sound occurs when the production sound is output, the second error sound is output. 2 Priority is given to the output sound, and when an error that outputs the first error sound occurs when the effect sound is output, the effect sound is output with priority, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is used. It is possible to display volume information (volume image G11) that can be changed according to the change in the volume of the sound output means, and if an error that outputs a second error sound occurs when outputting the production sound, the production The second error notification image (for example, fraud-related error image) corresponding to the second error sound can be displayed with priority over the effect image corresponding to the sound (for example, a limited-time image), and the first error is output when the effect sound is output. When an error for outputting a sound occurs, the first error notification image (for example, a fraud-related non-error image) corresponding to the first error sound can be displayed with priority over the effect image corresponding to the effect sound.

Therefore, since the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the error sound can be suitably output so that the output opportunity of the effect sound is secured as much as possible.
Further, since the second error sound is output with priority over the effect sound and the first error sound, for example,
By setting the second error sound as a fraud-related error sound, fraud is less likely to occur, and even if it does occur, it can be dealt with immediately.
Further, the priority of the sound is the first error sound <effect sound <second error sound, whereas the priority of the image is the effect image <first error notification image <second error notification image. That is, the priority of sound and the priority of image are different. Therefore, the effect sound can be output with priority over the first error sound, and the first error notification image can be displayed with priority over the effect image. Therefore, the priority of the sound and the priority of the image are the same. Compared with the case (that is, when the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound and the effect image is displayed with priority over the first error notification image), when the first error occurs. It will be possible to deal with it immediately.
In the present embodiment, when the timing of outputting the first sound and the timing of outputting the second sound having a higher priority than the first sound overlap, during the output of the second sound. The first sound is set to a non-output state, that is, a mute state, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, during the output of the second sound, if the volume of the first sound is lower than the original volume (volume when the output timing does not overlap with the second sound) (including the mute state). good.

《Operation sound and error sound》
As described above, when the player performs a change operation (volume change operation or brightness change operation) for adjusting the game environment, the operation sounds corresponding to the change operation are output from the speakers 19a and 19b (FIG. 56). reference). In the present embodiment, the operation sound corresponding to the change operation is set to have a lower priority than the fraud-related error sound and a higher priority than the fraud-non-related error sound.
FIG. 71 shows an example of volume notification during error notification. Since the same processing as the volume notification is performed in the luminance notification, the description of the luminance notification using the drawings will be omitted.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when an illegally related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t198,
t201, t204), display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, and adjust the volume. On the other hand, when an illegally related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300 displays and operates the volume image G11 even if the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194). It is configured so that it does not output sound or adjust the volume.

Further, FIGS. 72 and 73 show another example of the volume notification during the error notification.
The example shown in FIG. 72 is different from the example shown in FIG. 71 in that the volume image G11 is displayed and the volume is adjusted during the output of the fraud-related error sound.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when an illegally related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t198,
t201, t204), display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, and adjust the volume. Further, when an error sound related to fraud such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300
When the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194), the volume image G11 is displayed and the volume is adjusted, but the operation sound may not be output.

The example shown in FIG. 73 is different from the example shown in FIG. 72 in that the operation sound is output from the middle when the output of the fraud-related error sound is completed.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when an illegally related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t198,
t201, t204), display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, and adjust the volume. Further, when an error sound related to fraud such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300
When the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194), the volume image G11 is displayed and the volume is adjusted, and then when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends (t195), the output of the fraud-related error sound ends. If the original output period (t194 to t196) of the operation sound has not ended at that time, the operation sound may be output from the middle.

When the fraud-related error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error related to fraudulent activity is output, the fraud-related error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41, or an error not related to fraudulent activity may be displayed. When an illegally unrelated error sound for notifying the occurrence of the error is output, an illegally unrelated error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
Further, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-non-related error image, and the volume image G11 may or may not be the same as the sound. That is, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-non-related error image, and the volume image G11 (including the image such as the cross key) may or may not be the same as the sound. .. That is, the display may be controlled so that the priority is higher in the order of the fraudulent non-related error image <volume image G11 <illegal related error image (in the same order as the sound), or the volume image G11 <illegal non-related error image. <Display control may be performed so that the priority is higher in the order of fraud-related error images (order different from the sound).

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, the volume setting means for changing the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b according to a predetermined operation (volume change operation) of the player. (Production control device 300) and speakers 19a, 1 according to a predetermined operation.
A display control means (effect control device 300) that displays volume information (volume image G11) related to the volume of 9b on the display device 41, and an output control means (effect control device 300) that controls the sounds output from the speakers 19a and 19b. ), And an error sound () to notify the occurrence of a predetermined error.
For example, when a predetermined operation is performed while the fraud-related error sound) is output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the display control means displays the volume information, and the output control means operates according to the volume information. No sound is output (see FIG. 72).

Therefore, since the error sound is output with priority over the operation sound, the error sound can be output suitably.
Further, during the output of the error sound, the operation sound corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is not output, but the volume information corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is displayed, so that the player can perform the predetermined operation. Can be recognized as being successfully accepted.
The error sound that is output with priority over the operation sound is not limited to the fraud-related error sound.
It can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, an illegal and unrelated error sound.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

For example, it is possible to output a predetermined sound at a volume different from the volume set by the player (or the hall). The same applies to the brightness.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "4", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is set to "4".
The volume of the limited-time sound is "3", the volume of the error sound not related to fraud is "2", and the volume of the BGM is "1".
May be. That is, the fraud-related error sound may be output at a volume set by the player, and other sounds may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Further, for example, when the player setting is "5", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "7", the volume of the limited-time sound is "6", the volume of the fraud-unrelated error sound is "5", and the volume of the BGM. May be set to "4". That is, an illegal non-related error sound (or a limited-time sound) is output at a volume set by the player, and a sound having a higher priority than an illegal non-related error sound (or a limited-time sound) is output by the player. The sound may be output at a volume higher than the volume set by the player, and a sound having a lower priority than the fraudulent unrelated error sound (or a limited-time sound) may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Further, in the above embodiment, the volume can be adjusted in the range of 1 to 5, but it may be adjusted to "0 (silence)". When the player setting is "0 (silence)", the volume of the fraud-related error sound may be set to "1" and the volume of other sounds may be set to "0". That is, the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be muted. Of course, it is also possible to mute all sounds including fraud-related error sounds.

Further, regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall), the ratio of the volume output within a predetermined range may be fixed. That is, for example, the sound may be output according to the output volume value calculated by the output volume value = m (player setting value) × a (magnification <coefficient> corresponding to each sound). However, when the volume set by the player (or hall) is "0 (silence)", the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be muted as described above. The same applies to the brightness.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "3", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is set to "3.3".
(Magnification 1.1x) ”, Limited time sound volume“ 3 (Magnification 1x) ”, Illegal unrelated error sound volume“ 2.4 (Magnification 0.8x) ”, BGM volume“ When the player setting is "4", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is set to "4.4 (magnification 1.1 times)" and the volume of the limited-time sound is set to "2.1 (magnification 0.7 times)". 4 (magnification 1x) ", the volume of the error sound not related to fraud is" 3.2 (magnification 0.8x) "
”, The volume of BGM may be“ 2.8 (magnification 0.7 times) ”.
Further, if the specification is such that the volume value changes from the player set value to the hall set value in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = m (player set value) × a (each) in a state other than the customer waiting state. Sound is output according to the output volume value calculated by the magnification <coefficient> corresponding to the sound, and in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = M (hall set value) x a (magnification <coefficient corresponding to each sound). Sound may be output according to the output volume value calculated in>).

The error sound and the limited-time sound can be output at a predetermined volume (for example, the maximum volume) regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall setting), but the player (or the hall) By configuring to output various sounds depending on the volume set by, even if an error sound or a limited-time sound is output at the time of inspection etc., it is not noisy, so inspection work etc. can be performed comfortably. It will be possible.
In addition, when various sounds are output depending on the volume set by the player (or hall), the magnification and output mode of the various sounds are predetermined, so that the control is easy and the control is easy.
Even if all the sounds overlap, the priority is clear, so the importance is easy to understand.

When using the cross key for volume change operation and brightness change operation, use either the up / down key of the cross key for volume change operation or brightness change operation, and use the left / right key of the cross key for volume. When using either the change operation or the brightness change operation, when either the up / down key or the left / right key is operated at the same time, that is, the volume change operation and the brightness change operation are performed at the same time. In that case, only one of (1) volume change and brightness change is performed.
Either (2) the volume change and the brightness change are not performed, or (3) the volume change and the brightness change are both performed.
In addition, when the player performs a long press operation as a brightness change operation while adjusting the volume by performing a long press operation as a volume change operation, (1) the volume is changed during the brightness change operation. (No brightness change), (2) Volume change speed decreases during brightness change operation (may be a function that can be fine-tuned), (3) Volume change and volume change during brightness change operation. Either the brightness may not be changed, or (4) the brightness may be changed (the volume may not be changed) during the brightness change operation.

10 Game machine 19a, 19b speaker (notification means, sound output means)
21 Upper plate (storage plate)
23 Lower plate (storage plate)
25 Production button (operation means)
38 Special variable winning device (variable winning device)
41 Display device (display means)
44a Movable accessory 61 Magnetic sensor 62 Panel radio wave sensor (radio wave sensor)
100 Game control device (setting means, special game state control means)
200 Payout control device (payout control means)
300 Production control device (notification means, display control means, output control means, first display control means, second display control means, volume setting means)
G11 volume image (1st notification display, notification display, 1st display, volume information)
G12 error image (second notification display, error display)
Change image for G24 production (second display)
G31 total number of acquisition images (ball number notification display)

Claims (1)

In a game machine equipped with a display device that plays a game in which identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A display control means capable of displaying a display that changes according to the operation of the operation means on the display device is provided.
The display is a gaming machine characterized in that the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation differs according to a predetermined condition.

Images